GKD-C SMA with NET [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C SMA on NET is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent
Confirmation 1: SMA on NET as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-C SMA on NET
What is the SMA on NET?
This is a SMA with NET (Noise Elimination Technology)--a sort of a rolling Kendall rank correlation coefficient. The NET calculation is used to identify the "trend" of a SMA. As such, the signal is not the same as the slope change of the SMA.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
ค้นหาในสคริปต์สำหรับ "entry"
GKD-C Nonlinear Kalman Filter [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C Nonlinear Kalman Filter is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent
Confirmation 1: Nonlinear Kalman Filter as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-C Nonlinear Kalman Filter
What is the Nonlinear Kalman Filter?
The Nonlinear Kalman Filter is an invention of John Ehlers. It's calculated like so:
-Take EMA of price (better, a 3 Pole filter)
-Take the difference (delta) between Price and its EMA
-Take an EMA of delta (or a 3 Pole filter). A) Smoothing will help reduce whipsaws; B) Ideally, smoothing introduces no major trend mode lag because delta is detrended
-Add the smoothed delta to EMA for a zero lag curve.
-Add 2*(smoothed delta) to EMA for a smoother predictive line
This version contains 60+ pre-smoothing moving averages and 30+ source types.
This version contains three orders
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Fast Discrete Cosine Transform of Price [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C Fast Discrete Cosine Transform of Price is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent
Confirmation 1: Fast Discrete Cosine Transform of Price as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-C Fast Discrete Cosine Transform of Price
What is Fast Discrete Cosine Transform?
What is the Fast Discrete Cosine Transform?
Algolib is a C++ library for algorithmic trading that provides various algorithms for processing and analyzing financial data. The library includes a Fast Discrete Cosine Transform (FDCT) implementation, which is a fast version of the Discrete Cosine Transform (DCT) algorithm used for signal processing and data compression.
The FDCT implementation in Algolib is based on the FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) algorithm, which is a widely used method for computing the DCT. The implementation is optimized for performance and can handle large datasets efficiently. It uses the standard divide-and-conquer approach to compute the DCT recursively and combines the resulting coefficients to obtain the final DCT of the input signal.
The input to the FDCT algorithm in Algolib is a one-dimensional array of real numbers, which represents a time series or a financial signal. The algorithm then computes the DCT of the input sequence and returns a one-dimensional array of DCT coefficients, which represent the frequency components of the signal.
The implementation of the FDCT algorithm in Algolib uses C++ templates to provide a generic implementation that can work with different data types. It also includes various optimizations, such as loop unrolling, to improve the performance of the algorithm.
The steps involved in the FDCT algorithm in Algolib are:
-Divide the input sequence into even and odd parts.
-Compute the DCT of the even and odd parts recursively.
-Combine the DCT coefficients of the even and odd parts to obtain the final DCT coefficients.
-The implementation of the FDCT algorithm in Algolib uses the FFTW (Fastest Fourier Transform in the West) library to perform the FFT computations, which is a highly optimized library for computing Fourier transforms.
In summary, the Fast Discrete Cosine Transform implementation in Algolib is a fast and efficient implementation of the DCT algorithm, which is used for processing financial signals and time series data. The implementation is optimized for performance and uses the FFT algorithm for fast computation. The implementation is generic and can work with different data types, and includes optimizations such as loop unrolling to improve the performance of the algorithm.
What is the Fast Discrete Cosine Transform in terms of Forex trading?
The Fast Discrete Cosine Transform (FDCT) is an algorithm used for signal processing and data compression that can also be applied in trading forex. The FDCT is used to transform financial data into a set of coefficients that represent the data in terms of cosine functions of different frequencies. These coefficients can be used to analyze the frequency components of financial signals and to develop trading strategies based on these components.
In trading forex, the FDCT can be applied to various financial signals, such as price data, volume data, and technical indicators. By applying the FDCT to these signals, traders can identify the dominant frequency components of the signals and use this information to develop trading strategies.
For example, traders can use the FDCT to identify cycles in the market and use this information to develop trend-following strategies. The FDCT can also be used to identify short-term fluctuations in the market and develop mean-reversion strategies based on these fluctuations.
The FDCT can also be used in combination with other technical analysis tools, such as moving averages, to improve the accuracy of trading signals. For example, traders can apply the FDCT to the moving average of a financial signal to identify the dominant frequency components of the moving average and use this information to develop trading signals.
The FDCT can also be used in conjunction with machine learning algorithms to develop predictive models for financial markets. By applying the FDCT to financial data and using the resulting coefficients as inputs to a machine learning algorithm, traders can develop models that predict future price movements and identify profitable trading opportunities.
In summary, the FDCT can be applied in trading forex to analyze the frequency components of financial signals and develop trading strategies based on these components. The FDCT can be used in conjunction with other technical analysis tools and machine learning algorithms to improve the accuracy of trading signals and develop predictive models for financial markets.
This indicator has period lengths that are powers of powers of 2. There is also a features to increase the resolution of the FDCT.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C RSI of Fast Discrete Cosine Transform [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C RSI of Fast Discrete Cosine Transform is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent
Confirmation 1: RSI of Fast Discrete Cosine Transform as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ Fast Discrete Cosine Transform
What is the Fast Discrete Cosine Transform?
Algolib is a C++ library for algorithmic trading that provides various algorithms for processing and analyzing financial data. The library includes a Fast Discrete Cosine Transform (FDCT) implementation, which is a fast version of the Discrete Cosine Transform (DCT) algorithm used for signal processing and data compression.
The FDCT implementation in Algolib is based on the FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) algorithm, which is a widely used method for computing the DCT. The implementation is optimized for performance and can handle large datasets efficiently. It uses the standard divide-and-conquer approach to compute the DCT recursively and combines the resulting coefficients to obtain the final DCT of the input signal.
The input to the FDCT algorithm in Algolib is a one-dimensional array of real numbers, which represents a time series or a financial signal. The algorithm then computes the DCT of the input sequence and returns a one-dimensional array of DCT coefficients, which represent the frequency components of the signal.
The implementation of the FDCT algorithm in Algolib uses C++ templates to provide a generic implementation that can work with different data types. It also includes various optimizations, such as loop unrolling, to improve the performance of the algorithm.
The steps involved in the FDCT algorithm in Algolib are:
-Divide the input sequence into even and odd parts.
-Compute the DCT of the even and odd parts recursively.
-Combine the DCT coefficients of the even and odd parts to obtain the final DCT coefficients.
-The implementation of the FDCT algorithm in Algolib uses the FFTW (Fastest Fourier Transform in the West) library to perform the FFT computations, which is a highly optimized library for computing Fourier transforms.
In summary, the Fast Discrete Cosine Transform implementation in Algolib is a fast and efficient implementation of the DCT algorithm, which is used for processing financial signals and time series data. The implementation is optimized for performance and uses the FFT algorithm for fast computation. The implementation is generic and can work with different data types, and includes optimizations such as loop unrolling to improve the performance of the algorithm.
What is the Fast Discrete Cosine Transform in terms of Forex trading?
The Fast Discrete Cosine Transform (FDCT) is an algorithm used for signal processing and data compression that can also be applied in trading forex. The FDCT is used to transform financial data into a set of coefficients that represent the data in terms of cosine functions of different frequencies. These coefficients can be used to analyze the frequency components of financial signals and to develop trading strategies based on these components.
In trading forex, the FDCT can be applied to various financial signals, such as price data, volume data, and technical indicators. By applying the FDCT to these signals, traders can identify the dominant frequency components of the signals and use this information to develop trading strategies.
For example, traders can use the FDCT to identify cycles in the market and use this information to develop trend-following strategies. The FDCT can also be used to identify short-term fluctuations in the market and develop mean-reversion strategies based on these fluctuations.
The FDCT can also be used in combination with other technical analysis tools, such as moving averages, to improve the accuracy of trading signals. For example, traders can apply the FDCT to the moving average of a financial signal to identify the dominant frequency components of the moving average and use this information to develop trading signals.
The FDCT can also be used in conjunction with machine learning algorithms to develop predictive models for financial markets. By applying the FDCT to financial data and using the resulting coefficients as inputs to a machine learning algorithm, traders can develop models that predict future price movements and identify profitable trading opportunities.
In summary, the FDCT can be applied in trading forex to analyze the frequency components of financial signals and develop trading strategies based on these components. The FDCT can be used in conjunction with other technical analysis tools and machine learning algorithms to improve the accuracy of trading signals and develop predictive models for financial markets.
What is the Fast Discrete Cosine Transform in terms of Forex trading?
The Fast Discrete Cosine Transform (FDCT) is an algorithm used for signal processing and data compression that can also be applied in trading forex. The FDCT is used to transform financial data into a set of coefficients that represent the data in terms of cosine functions of different frequencies. These coefficients can be used to analyze the frequency components of financial signals and to develop trading strategies based on these components.
In trading forex, the FDCT can be applied to various financial signals, such as price data, volume data, and technical indicators. By applying the FDCT to these signals, traders can identify the dominant frequency components of the signals and use this information to develop trading strategies.
For example, traders can use the FDCT to identify cycles in the market and use this information to develop trend-following strategies. The FDCT can also be used to identify short-term fluctuations in the market and develop mean-reversion strategies based on these fluctuations.
The FDCT can also be used in combination with other technical analysis tools, such as moving averages, to improve the accuracy of trading signals. For example, traders can apply the FDCT to the moving average of a financial signal to identify the dominant frequency components of the moving average and use this information to develop trading signals.
The FDCT can also be used in conjunction with machine learning algorithms to develop predictive models for financial markets. By applying the FDCT to financial data and using the resulting coefficients as inputs to a machine learning algorithm, traders can develop models that predict future price movements and identify profitable trading opportunities.
In summary, the FDCT can be applied in trading forex to analyze the frequency components of financial signals and develop trading strategies based on these components. The FDCT can be used in conjunction with other technical analysis tools and machine learning algorithms to improve the accuracy of trading signals and develop predictive models for financial markets.
█ Relative Strength Index (RSI)
This indicator contains 7 different types of RSI .
RSX
Regular
Slow
Rapid
Harris
Cuttler
Ehlers Smoothed
What is RSI?
RSI stands for Relative Strength Index . It is a technical indicator used to measure the strength or weakness of a financial instrument's price action.
The RSI is calculated based on the price movement of an asset over a specified period of time, typically 14 days, and is expressed on a scale of 0 to 100. The RSI is considered overbought when it is above 70 and oversold when it is below 30.
Traders and investors use the RSI to identify potential buy and sell signals. When the RSI indicates that an asset is oversold, it may be considered a buying opportunity, while an overbought RSI may signal that it is time to sell or take profits.
It's important to note that the RSI should not be used in isolation and should be used in conjunction with other technical and fundamental analysis tools to make informed trading decisions.
What is RSX?
Jurik RSX is a technical analysis indicator that is a variation of the Relative Strength Index Smoothed ( RSX ) indicator. It was developed by Mark Jurik and is designed to help traders identify trends and momentum in the market.
The Jurik RSX uses a combination of the RSX indicator and an adaptive moving average (AMA) to smooth out the price data and reduce the number of false signals. The adaptive moving average is designed to adjust the smoothing period based on the current market conditions, which makes the indicator more responsive to changes in price.
The Jurik RSX can be used to identify potential trend reversals and momentum shifts in the market. It oscillates between 0 and 100, with values above 50 indicating a bullish trend and values below 50 indicating a bearish trend . Traders can use these levels to make trading decisions, such as buying when the indicator crosses above 50 and selling when it crosses below 50.
The Jurik RSX is a more advanced version of the RSX indicator, and while it can be useful in identifying potential trade opportunities, it should not be used in isolation. It is best used in conjunction with other technical and fundamental analysis tools to make informed trading decisions.
What is Slow RSI?
Slow RSI is a variation of the traditional Relative Strength Index ( RSI ) indicator. It is a more smoothed version of the RSI and is designed to filter out some of the noise and short-term price fluctuations that can occur with the standard RSI .
The Slow RSI uses a longer period of time than the traditional RSI , typically 21 periods instead of 14. This longer period helps to smooth out the price data and makes the indicator less reactive to short-term price fluctuations.
Like the traditional RSI , the Slow RSI is used to identify potential overbought and oversold conditions in the market. It oscillates between 0 and 100, with values above 70 indicating overbought conditions and values below 30 indicating oversold conditions. Traders often use these levels as potential buy and sell signals.
The Slow RSI is a more conservative version of the RSI and can be useful in identifying longer-term trends in the market. However, it can also be slower to respond to changes in price, which may result in missed trading opportunities. Traders may choose to use a combination of both the Slow RSI and the traditional RSI to make informed trading decisions.
What is Rapid RSI?
Same as regular RSI but with a faster calculation method
What is Harris RSI?
Harris RSI is a technical analysis indicator that is a variation of the Relative Strength Index ( RSI ). It was developed by Larry Harris and is designed to help traders identify potential trend changes and momentum shifts in the market.
The Harris RSI uses a different calculation formula compared to the traditional RSI . It takes into account both the opening and closing prices of a financial instrument, as well as the high and low prices. The Harris RSI is also normalized to a range of 0 to 100, with values above 50 indicating a bullish trend and values below 50 indicating a bearish trend .
Like the traditional RSI , the Harris RSI is used to identify potential overbought and oversold conditions in the market. It oscillates between 0 and 100, with values above 70 indicating overbought conditions and values below 30 indicating oversold conditions. Traders often use these levels as potential buy and sell signals.
The Harris RSI is a more advanced version of the RSI and can be useful in identifying longer-term trends in the market. However, it can also generate more false signals than the standard RSI . Traders may choose to use a combination of both the Harris RSI and the traditional RSI to make informed trading decisions.
What is Cuttler RSI?
Cuttler RSI is a technical analysis indicator that is a variation of the Relative Strength Index ( RSI ). It was developed by Curt Cuttler and is designed to help traders identify potential trend changes and momentum shifts in the market.
The Cuttler RSI uses a different calculation formula compared to the traditional RSI . It takes into account the difference between the closing price of a financial instrument and the average of the high and low prices over a specified period of time. This difference is then normalized to a range of 0 to 100, with values above 50 indicating a bullish trend and values below 50 indicating a bearish trend .
Like the traditional RSI , the Cuttler RSI is used to identify potential overbought and oversold conditions in the market. It oscillates between 0 and 100, with values above 70 indicating overbought conditions and values below 30 indicating oversold conditions. Traders often use these levels as potential buy and sell signals.
The Cuttler RSI is a more advanced version of the RSI and can be useful in identifying longer-term trends in the market. However, it can also generate more false signals than the standard RSI . Traders may choose to use a combination of both the Cuttler RSI and the traditional RSI to make informed trading decisions.
What is Ehlers Smoothed RSI?
Ehlers smoothed RSI is a technical analysis indicator that is a variation of the Relative Strength Index ( RSI ). It was developed by John Ehlers and is designed to help traders identify potential trend changes and momentum shifts in the market.
The Ehlers smoothed RSI uses a different calculation formula compared to the traditional RSI . It uses a smoothing algorithm that is designed to reduce the noise and random fluctuations that can occur with the standard RSI . The smoothing algorithm is based on a concept called "digital signal processing" and is intended to improve the accuracy of the indicator.
Like the traditional RSI , the Ehlers smoothed RSI is used to identify potential overbought and oversold conditions in the market. It oscillates between 0 and 100, with values above 70 indicating overbought conditions and values below 30 indicating oversold conditions. Traders often use these levels as potential buy and sell signals.
The Ehlers smoothed RSI can be useful in identifying longer-term trends and momentum shifts in the market. However, it can also generate more false signals than the standard RSI . Traders may choose to use a combination of both the Ehlers smoothed RSI and the traditional RSI to make informed trading decisions.
█ GKD-C RSI of Fast Discrete Cosine Transform
What is the RSI of Fast Discrete Cosine Transform in terms of Forex trading?
The Relative Strength Index (RSI) is a popular technical indicator used in trading forex to measure the strength of a trend and identify potential trend reversals. While the Fast Discrete Cosine Transform (FDCT) is not directly related to the RSI, it can be used to analyze the frequency components of the price data used to calculate the RSI and improve its accuracy.
The RSI is calculated by comparing the average gains and losses of a financial instrument over a given period of time. The RSI value ranges from 0 to 100, with values above 70 indicating an overbought market and values below 30 indicating an oversold market.
One limitation of the RSI is that it only considers the average gains and losses over a fixed period of time, which may not capture the complex patterns and dynamics of financial markets. This is where the FDCT can be useful.
By applying the FDCT to the price data used to calculate the RSI, traders can identify the dominant frequency components of the price data and use this information to adjust the RSI calculation. For example, traders can weight the gains and losses based on the frequency components identified by the FDCT, giving more weight to the dominant frequencies and less weight to the lower frequencies.
This approach can improve the accuracy of the RSI calculation and provide traders with more reliable signals for identifying trends and potential trend reversals. Traders can also use the frequency components identified by the FDCT to develop more advanced trading strategies, such as identifying cycles in the market and using this information to develop trend-following strategies.
In summary, while the FDCT is not directly related to the RSI, it can be used to analyze the frequency components of the price data used to calculate the RSI and improve its accuracy. Traders can use the FDCT to identify dominant frequency components and adjust the RSI calculation accordingly, providing more reliable signals for identifying trends and potential trend reversals.
This indicator has period lengths that are powers of powers of 2. There is also a features to increase the resolution of the FDCT.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-V Hurst Exponent [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-V Hurst Exponent is a Volatility/Volume module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 1: Vortex
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-C Hurst Exponent
What is the Fractal Dimension Index?
The goal of the fractal dimension index is to determine whether the market is trending or in a trading range. It does not measure the direction of the trend. A value less than 1.5 indicates that the price series is persistent or that the market is trending. Lower values of the FDI indicate a stronger trend. A value greater than 1.5 indicates that the market is in a trading range and is acting in a more random fashion.
What is the Hurst Exponent?
The Hurst exponent is a statistical measure that describes the degree of long-term memory in a time series data, including forex trading data. It is used to identify the persistence or anti-persistence of the data over different time horizons.
In forex trading, the Hurst exponent can be used to identify the degree of trendiness in price movements. When the Hurst exponent is above 0.5, it indicates that the price movements have a persistent or trending behavior, while a Hurst exponent below 0.5 suggests that the price movements are anti-persistent or mean-reverting in nature.
The Fractal Dimension Index (FDI) is another technical indicator used in forex trading that is related to the Hurst exponent. The FDI measures the degree of self-similarity or fractal dimension of the price movements over different time horizons. A high FDI indicates that the price movements are more self-similar and fractal-like, while a low FDI suggests that the price movements are less self-similar and more random in nature.
The Hurst exponent and the FDI are related because they both measure the degree of persistence or anti-persistence in price movements. In fact, the Hurst exponent can be calculated from the FDI using a simple formula. The formula relates the Hurst exponent to the FDI through the expression H = 2 - FDI.
Traders can use the Hurst exponent and the FDI in conjunction with other technical indicators to identify trading opportunities in the forex market. For example, a trader may use a high Hurst exponent or a high FDI to identify a strong trend and use a trend-following strategy. Conversely, a low Hurst exponent or a low FDI may suggest a potential trend reversal, prompting the trader to use a mean-reversion strategy.
In summary, the Hurst exponent and the FDI are two technical indicators that measure the degree of persistence or anti-persistence in price movements in the forex market. They are related because they both measure the fractal-like behavior of the price movements over different time horizons. Traders can use these indicators in combination with other technical analysis techniques to identify trading opportunities and manage risk.
Requirements
Inputs
Chained: GKD-B Baseline
Solo: NA, no inputs
Outputs
Chained: GKD-C indicators Confirmation 1 or Solo Confirmation Complex
Solo: GKD-BT Backtest
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Blau Ergodic MACD [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C Blau Ergodic MACD is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Damiani Volatmeter
Confirmation 1: Blau Ergodic MACD as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-C Blau Ergodic MACD
The Blau Ergodic MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence) is a technical analysis indicator that was developed by William Blau. It is a modification of the traditional MACD indicator, designed to provide a smoother and more responsive moving average calculation. The Blau Ergodic MACD incorporates the concept of Ergodicity, which is a mathematical concept that describes the long-term behavior of a system. The Ergodicity principle is used to filter out market noise and provide a clearer representation of the underlying trend.
The Blau Ergodic MACD consists of two lines, the Blau line and the signal line. The Blau line is calculated as the difference between two exponential moving averages (EMAs) that are smoothed using the Ergodicity principle. The signal line is a moving average of the Blau line. When the Blau line crosses above the signal line, it is considered a bullish signal, while a bearish signal is generated when the Blau line crosses below the signal line.
The Blau Ergodic MACD is a useful tool for traders and investors to identify potential trend reversals and to make informed trading decisions. It is particularly useful in volatile markets, where traditional technical indicators may be less effective.
This indicator includes both the Blau Ergodic MACD and the Blau MACD. The regular MACD is a zero-line cross, the Ergodic version is described above.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Blau OMA Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C Blau OMA Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Damiani Volatmeter
Confirmation 1: Blau OMA Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-C Blau OMA Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator
What is OMA?
Adaptive, One More Moving Average (OMA) is an adaptive moving average created by Mladen Rakic that changes shape with volatility and momentum
The usual story goes something like this : which is the best moving average? Everyone that ever started to do any kind of technical analysis was pulled into this "game". Comparing, testing, looking for new ones, testing ...
The idea of this one is simple: it should not be itself, but it should be a kind of a chameleon - it should "imitate" as much other moving averages as it can. So the need for zillion different moving averages would diminish. And it should have some extra, of course:
The extras:
it has to be smooth
it has to be able to "change speed" without length change
it has to be able to adapt or not (since it has to "imitate" the non-adaptive as well as the adaptive ones)
The steps:
Smoothing - compared are the simple moving average (that is the basis and the first step of this indicator - a smoothed simple moving average with as little lag added as it is possible and as close to the original as it is possible) Speed 1 and non-adaptive are the reference for this basic setup.
Speed changing - same chart only added one more average with "speeds" 2 and 3 (for comparison purposes only here)
Finally - adapting : same chart with SMA compared to one more average with speed 1 but adaptive (so this parameters would make it a "smoothed adaptive simple average") Adapting part is a modified Kaufman adapting way and this part (the adapting part) may be a subject for changes in the future (it is giving satisfactory results, but if or when I find a better way, it will be implemented here)
Some comparisons for different speed settings (all the comparisons are without adaptive turned on, and are approximate. Approximation comes from a fact that it is impossible to get exactly the same values from only one way of calculation, and frankly, I even did not try to get those same values).
speed 0.5 - T3 (0.618 Tilson)
speed 2.5 - T3 (0.618 Fulks/Matulich)
speed 1 - SMA , harmonic mean
speed 2 - LWMA
speed 7 - very similar to Hull and TEMA
speed 8 - very similar to LSMA and Linear regression value
Parameters:
Length - length (period) for averaging
Source - price to use for averaging
Speed - desired speed (i limited to -1.5 on the lower side but it even does not need that limit - some interesting results with speeds that are less than 0 can be achieved)
Adaptive - does it adapt or not
What is OMA Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator?
We refer to the Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator (ECO) as a momentum indicator, which considers the candlestick body's size and direction. It is a reliable and smooth momentum indicator because it is not affected by price gaps, unlike other momentum indicators. It can be used to confirm or define trends, and we use it as an alternative to weekly indicators. To determine the trend, you can look at the indicator's location relative to the "0" line, where above "0" indicates an uptrend and below "0" indicates a downtrend. Additionally, the slope and crossing points of the slow and fast lines can be used as an additional qualifier. When the ECO is below "0," only short signals from the Hi-Lo Activator should be taken, and when it is above "0," only long signals should be taken.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Blau T3 Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C Blau T3 Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator is a Volatility/Volume module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Damiani Volatmeter
Confirmation 1: Blau T3 Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-C Blau T3 Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator
What is T3?
The T3 Moving Average (T3MA) is a technical analysis indicator that was developed by Tim Tillson. It is a trend-following indicator that aims to provide a smoother and more accurate representation of price trends than other moving average indicators.
The T3MA is a type of exponential moving average ( EMA ) that is calculated using a series of complex formulas. Unlike a simple or exponential moving average , which use fixed smoothing factors, the T3MA uses a variable smoothing factor that is based on the volatility of the underlying asset. This means that the T3MA is able to adapt to changing market conditions and provide more accurate signals.
The formula for calculating the T3MA is as follows:
T3 = a * EMA1 + (1 - a) * T3
Where:
-T3 is the current value of the T3MA
-EMA1 is the current value of the first EMA
-T3 is the previous value of the T3MA
-a is the smoothing factor, which is based on the volatility of the underlying asset and is calculated using the following formulas:
-c1 = -1 + exp (-sqrt(2) * pi / period)
-c2 = 2 * c1 * c1 + 2 * c1
-c3 = 1 - c1 - c2
-a = c1 * sqrt(period) * (close - T3) + c2 * T3 + c3 * EMA1
In simple terms, the T3MA is calculated by taking a weighted average of two different EMAs, with the weight given to each EMA depending on the volatility of the asset being analyzed. The T3MA is then smoothed using a second smoothing factor, which further reduces noise and improves the accuracy of the indicator.
The T3MA can be used in a variety of ways by traders and analysts. Some common applications include using the T3MA as a trend-following indicator, with buy signals generated when the price of an asset crosses above the T3MA and sell signals generated when the price crosses below. The T3MA can also be used in combination with other indicators and analytical techniques to confirm trading decisions and identify potential trend reversals.
Overall, the T3 Moving Average is a highly sophisticated and complex technical indicator that is designed to provide a more accurate and reliable representation of price trends. While it may be difficult for novice traders to understand and use effectively, experienced traders and analysts may find the T3MA to be a valuable tool in their trading toolbox.
What is T3 Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator?
We refer to the Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator (ECO) as a momentum indicator, which considers the candlestick body's size and direction. It is a reliable and smooth momentum indicator because it is not affected by price gaps, unlike other momentum indicators. It can be used to confirm or define trends, and we use it as an alternative to weekly indicators. To determine the trend, you can look at the indicator's location relative to the "0" line, where above "0" indicates an uptrend and below "0" indicates a downtrend. Additionally, the slope and crossing points of the slow and fast lines can be used as an additional qualifier. When the ECO is below "0," only short signals from the Hi-Lo Activator should be taken, and when it is above "0," only long signals should be taken.
The difference here is that instead of using a regular old SMA or EMA, we use T3 for the double smoothing and signal.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Grucha Percentage Index [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C Grucha Percentage Index is a Volatility/Volume module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Damiani Volatmeter
Confirmation 1: Grucha Percentage Index as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-C Grucha Percentage Index
The Grucha Percentage Index finds the difference between open and close prices and then runs a comparison based on whether the difference is positive or negative. This indicator has three types of signals:
1. Trigger line cross over 50 line
2. Signal line cross over 50 line
3. Trigger over/under signal line crosses
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C FDI-Adaptive Supertrend [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C FDI-Adaptive Supertrend is a Volatility/Volume module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Damiani Volatmeter as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 1: FDI-Adaptive Supertrend as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-C FDI-Adaptive Supertrend
What is the Fractal Dimension Index?
The Fractal Dimension Index (FDI) is a measure of the complexity or irregularity of a geometric shape or pattern. It is a mathematical concept that quantifies the degree of self-similarity or self-affinity of an object at different scales. The FDI is a real number that represents the scaling behavior of an object in a particular space, and it can be used to characterize a wide range of natural and synthetic phenomena, from coastlines to fractal art.
The FDI is based on the concept of fractals, which are objects that exhibit self-similar or self-affine patterns at different scales. Fractals are characterized by their fractional dimensionality, which is a non-integer number that describes their complexity. The FDI is a measure of this fractional dimensionality, and it can be calculated using a variety of mathematical techniques, including box counting, wavelet analysis, and Fourier analysis.
In practical terms, the FDI can be used to quantify the complexity or roughness of natural surfaces, such as soil or rock, as well as the irregularity of synthetic materials, such as concrete or ceramics. It is also used in image analysis and pattern recognition to characterize the complexity of digital images and to detect patterns that are difficult to discern with traditional methods.
In forex trading, the Fractal Dimension Index (FDI) is a technical indicator used to analyze market trends and price movements. The FDI is calculated based on the fractal geometry of price charts and is used to identify support and resistance levels, as well as potential changes in trend direction.
The FDI indicator works by measuring the fractal dimensionality of price movements. Fractals are self-similar or self-affine patterns that repeat at different scales, and they can be used to identify key levels of support and resistance in the market. The FDI indicator calculates the fractal dimension of price movements over a specified time period, and it plots the result as a line on the price chart.
Traders use the FDI indicator to identify potential trend changes and to confirm trend direction. When the FDI line crosses above or below a key level, such as 1.5, it may indicate a potential trend reversal. Additionally, when the FDI line is trending in the same direction as the price, it can confirm the current trend and provide additional confidence for traders.
Overall, the Fractal Dimension Index is a technical indicator that can be used to analyze market trends and price movements in forex trading. By measuring the fractal dimensionality of price movements, traders can identify potential support and resistance levels and confirm trend direction.
What is Supertrend?
Supertrend is a popular technical indicator used in trading to identify trends in the market. It is a trend-following indicator that helps traders to identify the direction of the market trend and to enter or exit trades accordingly.
The Supertrend indicator is based on the Average True Range (ATR) and the price action of an asset. It plots a line on the price chart that follows the trend of the asset and indicates potential support and resistance levels. The Supertrend line changes its color when the trend changes, which can be used as a signal to enter or exit trades.
The Supertrend indicator is used to identify both long-term and short-term trends in the market. When the Supertrend line is above the price, it indicates a downtrend, and when it is below the price, it indicates an uptrend. Traders can use the Supertrend indicator to identify potential entry and exit points for their trades, as well as to set stop-loss orders and take-profit levels.
Supertrend is a popular indicator among traders because it is easy to use and can be applied to a variety of markets and timeframes. However, like any technical indicator, it is not perfect and can produce false signals in certain market conditions. Therefore, it is important to use the Supertrend indicator in combination with other indicators and to have a solid trading strategy in place.
What is FDI-Adaptive Supertrend?
FDI-Adaptive Supertrend uses FDI to adapt the period inputs into Supertrend to make Supertrend FDI-adaptive.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-V Damiani Volatmeter [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-V Damiani Volatmeter is a Volatility/Volume module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Damiani Volatmeter as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 1: Fisher Transform
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-V Damiani Volatmeter
Damiani Volatmeter is a volatility measurement indicator to determine whether volatility is high enough to trade.
Anything red means that volatility is low. Remember volatility doesn't have a direction. Anything green means volatility high despite the direction of price. The core signal line here is the green and red line that dips below two while threshold lines to "recharge". Maximum recharge happen when the core signal line shows a yellow ping. Soon after one or many yellow pings you should expect a massive upthrust of volatility . The idea here is you don't trade unless volatility is rising or green. This means that the Volatmeter has to dip into the recharge zone, recharge and then spike upward. You can also attempt to buy or sell reversals with confluence indicators when volatility is in the recharge zone, but I wouldn't recommend this. However, if you so choose to do this, then use the following indicator for confluence.
And last reminder, volatility doesn't have a direction! Red doesn't mean short, and green doesn't mean long, Red means don't trade period regardless of direction long/short, and green means trade no matter the direction long/short. This means you'll have to add an indicator that does show direction such as a mean reversion indicator like Fisher Transform or a Gaussian Filter. You can search my public scripts for various Fisher Transform and Gaussian Filter indicators.
Requirements
Inputs
Chained: GKD-B Baseline
Solo: NA, no inputs
Outputs
Chained: GKD-C indicators Confirmation 1 or Solo Confirmation Complex
Solo: GKD-BT Backtest
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Adaptive Parabolic SAR [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C Adaptive Parabolic SAR is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Jurik DMX
Confirmation 1: GKD-V Adaptive Parabolic SAR as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-V Adaptive Parabolic SAR
The Parabolic SAR indicator typically uses a fixed acceleration factor and step to calculate its values, which can result in false signals or inefficient performance in certain market conditions. The Adaptive Parabolic SAR attempts to address this issue by dynamically adjusting its acceleration factor and step based on the current market volatility and price movement.
The Adaptive Parabolic SAR uses an algorithm that is designed to adjust the acceleration factor and step in real-time based on the recent price action. This allows the indicator to be more responsive to changes in the market, while still maintaining its ability to provide reliable signals.
The indicator works by plotting a series of dots above or below the price bars, depending on the direction of the trend. When the dots are below the price bars, it indicates a bullish trend, and when the dots are above the price bars, it indicates a bearish trend. The dots also move closer to the price bars as the trend becomes stronger, and further away as the trend weakens.
Traders can use the Adaptive Parabolic SAR as a tool to identify potential trend reversals or to confirm the current trend. It is often used in conjunction with other technical indicators and price action analysis to develop trading strategies.
The Kaufman adaptivity uses efficiency ratio to adapt PSAR while the Ehlers adaptivity uses raw Momentum.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C EMA-Deviation-Corrected Super Smoother [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C EMA-Deviation-Corrected Super Smoother is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
? Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Jurik DMX
Confirmation 1: GKD-V EMA-Deviation-Corrected Super Smoother as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
? GKD-V EMA-Deviation-Corrected Super Smoother
The EMA-Deviation-Corrected Super Smoother is a type of filter that is designed to remove noise and provide a smoother representation of data. It is based on the Exponential Moving Average (EMA) and uses a deviation correction technique to improve its accuracy. The result is a more precise and reliable signal that can be used for a variety of applications, such as technical analysis in trading or data smoothing in scientific research.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Fractal-Dimension-Adaptive SMA w/ DSL [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C Fractal-Dimension-Adaptive SMA w/ DSL is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Jurik DMX
Confirmation 1: GKD-V Fractal-Dimension-Adaptive SMA w/ DSL as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-V Fractal-Dimension-Adaptive SMA w/ DSL
Fractal-Dimension-Adaptive SMA (FDASMA) w/ DSL is a fractal-dimension-index-adaptive SMA . The SMA is accelerated during a trend and slowed down during a sideways market, so as to avoid false signals. This indicator uses the fractal dimension to compute an ingest period length into the SMA to output the FDASMA.
What is the Fractal Dimension Index?
The goal of the fractal dimension index is to determine whether the market is trending or in a trading range. It does not measure the direction of the trend. A value less than 1.5 indicates that the price series is persistent or that the market is trending. Lower values of the FDI indicate a stronger trend. A value greater than 1.5 indicates that the market is in a trading range and is acting in a more random fashion.
What are DSL Discontinued Signal Line?
A lot of indicators are using signal lines in order to determine the trend (or some desired state of the indicator) easier. The idea of the signal line is easy : comparing the value to it's smoothed (slightly lagging) state, the idea of current momentum/state is made.
Discontinued signal line is inheriting that simple signal line idea and it is extending it : instead of having one signal line, more lines depending on the current value of the indicator.
"Signal" line is calculated the following way :
When a certain level is crossed into the desired direction, the EMA of that value is calculated for the desired signal line
When that level is crossed into the opposite direction, the previous "signal" line value is simply "inherited" and it becomes a kind of a level
This way it becomes a combination of signal lines and levels that are trying to combine both the good from both methods.
In simple terms, DSL uses the concept of a signal line and betters it by inheriting the previous signal line's value & makes it a level.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C ATR-Stepped PDFMA [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C ATR-Stepped PDFMA is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Jurik DMX as shown on the chart
Confirmation 1: GKD-V ATR-Stepped PDFMA as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-V ATR-Stepped PDFMA
ATR-Stepped PDF MA is and ATR-stepped moving average that uses a probability density function moving average.
What is Probability Density Function?
Probability Density Function (PDF) is a statistical function used to describe the likelihood of a continuous random variable taking on a particular value or range of values. In other words, it describes the probability distribution of a random variable over a continuous range of values.
The PDF is defined as the derivative of the cumulative distribution function (CDF) of a continuous random variable. The CDF of a continuous random variable is the probability that the random variable takes on a value less than or equal to a given value. The PDF is a non-negative function that integrates to 1 over the entire range of the random variable.
The PDF is used to calculate the probability of the random variable taking on a value within a specific range. This is done by integrating the PDF over that range. The height of the PDF at a particular value of the random variable indicates the relative likelihood of that value occurring.
The PDF is an essential tool in many areas of statistics, including hypothesis testing, confidence interval estimation, and Bayesian inference.
Probability density function based MA is a sort of weighted moving average that uses probability density function to calculate the weights.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C T3 Velocity [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C T3 Velocity is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Volatility Ratio
Confirmation 1: GKD-V T3 Velocity as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-V T3 Velocity
What is T3?
The T3 Moving Average (T3MA) is a technical analysis indicator that was developed by Tim Tillson. It is a trend-following indicator that aims to provide a smoother and more accurate representation of price trends than other moving average indicators.
The T3MA is a type of exponential moving average (EMA) that is calculated using a series of complex formulas. Unlike a simple or exponential moving average, which use fixed smoothing factors, the T3MA uses a variable smoothing factor that is based on the volatility of the underlying asset. This means that the T3MA is able to adapt to changing market conditions and provide more accurate signals.
The formula for calculating the T3MA is as follows:
T3 = a * EMA1 + (1 - a) * T3
Where:
-T3 is the current value of the T3MA
-EMA1 is the current value of the first EMA
-T3 is the previous value of the T3MA
-a is the smoothing factor, which is based on the volatility of the underlying asset and is calculated using the following formulas:
-c1 = -1 + exp(-sqrt(2) * pi / period)
-c2 = 2 * c1 * c1 + 2 * c1
-c3 = 1 - c1 - c2
-a = c1 * sqrt(period) * (close - T3 ) + c2 * T3 + c3 * EMA1
In simple terms, the T3MA is calculated by taking a weighted average of two different EMAs, with the weight given to each EMA depending on the volatility of the asset being analyzed. The T3MA is then smoothed using a second smoothing factor, which further reduces noise and improves the accuracy of the indicator.
The T3MA can be used in a variety of ways by traders and analysts. Some common applications include using the T3MA as a trend-following indicator, with buy signals generated when the price of an asset crosses above the T3MA and sell signals generated when the price crosses below. The T3MA can also be used in combination with other indicators and analytical techniques to confirm trading decisions and identify potential trend reversals.
Overall, the T3 Moving Average is a highly sophisticated and complex technical indicator that is designed to provide a more accurate and reliable representation of price trends. While it may be difficult for novice traders to understand and use effectively, experienced traders and analysts may find the T3MA to be a valuable tool in their trading toolbox.
What is Velocity?
Velocity can have different meanings depending on the context. Here are a few definitions:
In physics, velocity is a measure of the rate and direction of motion of an object. It is typically expressed in meters per second (m/s) or another unit of distance divided by time.
In finance and economics, velocity refers to the speed at which money circulates in an economy. It is usually measured as the ratio of gross domestic product (GDP) to the money supply.
In trading, velocity can refer to the speed and magnitude of price movements. It can be used as an indicator of momentum or trend strength.
What is T3 Velocity?
T3 Velocity is a better performing MACD that uses different hot (alpha) values for the slow and fast period inputs.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Swing Line [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-V Swing Line is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Volatility Ratio
Confirmation 1: GKD-V Swing Line as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-V Swing Line
The swing line indicator is a technical analysis tool used in financial markets to identify the direction of a trend. It is also known as the trendline or zigzag indicator.
The swing line indicator plots a series of lines connecting the highs and lows of price movements over a given time period. Each line represents a swing high or swing low in the price action, depending on whether the trend is bullish or bearish.
In an uptrend, the swing line indicator connects each successive higher low, forming an ascending trendline. In a downtrend, the indicator connects each successive lower high, forming a descending trendline. When the trend changes direction, the indicator will create a new line to reflect the new swing high or low.
Traders use the swing line indicator to identify key levels of support and resistance, as well as potential entry and exit points for trades. A break of the trendline can signal a potential trend reversal, while a bounce off the trendline can indicate that the trend is still intact.
The swing line indicator can be used in conjunction with other technical analysis tools, such as moving averages, to confirm trends and reduce false signals. It is commonly used in forex, stock, and commodity markets, and is available on most charting platforms.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Jurik Smoother [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-V Jurik Smoother is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Volatility Ratio
Confirmation 1: GKD-V Jurik Smoother as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-V Jurik Smoother
Jurik Smoother (JS) is a smoothing function that reduces noise and false signals in price data. It is based on a weighted moving average that assigns more weight to recent data points and less weight to older data points. This helps to eliminate sudden price spikes and gaps in the data, making it easier to identify trends and patterns.
Jurik Smoother (JS) is a type of oscillator that was developed by Mark Jurik to reduce the noise and false signals that can be present in financial data. It is designed to be more responsive to changes in price trends than traditional oscillators, while also being less susceptible to whipsaw signals.
The Jurik Smoother is calculated using a weighted moving average that assigns more weight to recent data points and less weight to older data points. This means that it places greater emphasis on current price action, while smoothing out any erratic movements that could be caused by random fluctuations in the data.
One of the key features of the Jurik Smoother is its ability to adapt to changing market conditions. Unlike traditional oscillators, which use a fixed number of data points in their calculation, the Jurik Smoother adjusts its length based on the current volatility of the market. This helps to reduce lag time and increase the accuracy of the indicator in identifying trends.
The Jurik Smoother can be used in a variety of ways, including identifying trends, support and resistance levels, and potential entry and exit points for trades. It is particularly useful in markets that are prone to sudden price spikes and gaps, such as cryptocurrency and forex markets.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Jurik Volatility Adaptive EMA [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope Jurik Volatility Adaptive EMA is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Volatility Ratio
Confirmation 1: Jurik Volatility Adaptive EMA as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ Jurik Volatility Adaptive EMA
What is Jurik Filter?
The Jurik Filter is a technical analysis tool that is used to filter out market noise and identify trends in financial markets. It was developed by Mark Jurik in the 1990s and is based on a non-linear smoothing algorithm that provides a more accurate representation of price movements.
Traditional moving averages, such as the Simple Moving Average (SMA) or Exponential Moving Average (EMA), are linear filters that produce a lag between price and the moving average line. This can cause false signals during periods of market volatility, which can result in losses for traders and investors.
The Jurik Filter is designed to address this issue by incorporating a damping factor into the smoothing algorithm. This damping factor adjusts the filter's responsiveness to the changes in price, allowing it to filter out market noise without overshooting price peaks and valleys.
The Jurik Filter is calculated using a mathematical formula that takes into account the current and past prices of an asset, as well as the volatility of the market. This formula incorporates the damping factor and produces a smoother price curve than traditional moving average filters.
One of the advantages of the Jurik Filter is its ability to adjust to changing market conditions. The damping factor can be adjusted to suit different securities and time frames, making it a versatile tool for traders and investors.
Traders and investors often use the Jurik Filter in conjunction with other technical analysis tools, such as the MACD or RSI, to confirm or complement their trading strategies. By filtering out market noise and identifying trends in the financial markets, the Jurik Filter can help improve the accuracy of trading signals and reduce the risks of false signals during periods of market volatility.
Overall, the Jurik Filter is a powerful technical analysis tool that can help traders and investors make more informed decisions about buying and selling securities. By providing a smoother price curve and reducing false signals, it can help improve trading performance and reduce risk in volatile markets.
What is Jurik Volatility?
Jurik Volatility is a technical analysis indicator developed by Mark Jurik to measure the volatility of financial markets. It is designed to provide a more accurate measure of market volatility than other traditional volatility indicators, such as the Average True Range (ATR) or Standard Deviation.
The Jurik Volatility indicator uses a non-linear smoothing algorithm that filters out market noise and provides a more accurate representation of price movements. It is calculated by taking the difference between the current price and a moving average of prices, and then applying a damping factor to adjust the responsiveness of the indicator to changes in volatility.
The damping factor used in the Jurik Volatility indicator adjusts the speed at which the indicator responds to changes in volatility. This makes it more responsive during periods of high volatility and less responsive during periods of low volatility. This helps to filter out false signals and provides a more accurate representation of market volatility.
One of the advantages of the Jurik Volatility indicator is its ability to adjust to changing market conditions. The damping factor can be adjusted to suit different securities and time frames, making it a versatile tool for traders and investors.
Traders and investors often use the Jurik Volatility indicator to identify periods of high and low volatility in financial markets. It can help traders to adjust their trading strategies to suit different market conditions, and to manage their risk by adjusting their stop loss orders or position sizes.
Overall, the Jurik Volatility indicator is a useful tool for traders and investors who want to measure market volatility and make informed decisions about buying and selling securities. It can help to improve the accuracy of trading signals and reduce the risks of false signals during periods of market volatility.
What is the EMA?
The Exponential Moving Average (EMA) is a popular technical analysis indicator that gives more weight to recent price data than older data. It is a type of moving average that is calculated by applying a weighting factor to the price data based on the number of periods selected for the EMA calculation.
The formula for calculating the EMA is:
EMA = (Price(t) x Smoothing factor) + EMA(y) x (1 - Smoothing factor)
where:
-Price(t) is the current price
-EMA(y) is the EMA value for the previous period
-Smoothing factor = 2 / (Number of periods + 1)
The smoothing factor is used to give more weight to recent prices and less weight to older prices, with the weight decreasing exponentially over time. This makes the EMA more responsive to price changes than a simple moving average.
The EMA can be used to identify trend direction and potential reversals in the market. Traders often use EMAs of different periods to confirm trend direction and make trading decisions.
What is Jurik Volatility Adaptive EMA?
This indicator combines Jurik Filter with Jurik Volatility to form an crete an alpha value that is then injected into the EMA calculation to create an adaptive EMA.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
Strategy Developer ToolSolar Strategies: Strategy Developer Tool Complete Guide
This guide provides full explanation of the intended purpose of our script along with individual explanation of each input and the logic behind them coupled with general knowledge which we find useful in using our tool regarding elements of risk and strategy. Use this information wisely and understand we are not providing financial advise, this is a learning tool meant to help advance traders knowledge of the markets and their strategies which are formed as such.
Basics
Before getting into the specifics of how to use our strategy developer tool, it's important to understand a few basic fundamental things about it. The purpose of the tool is to allow the user to optimize a strategy through back testing with our strategy tracker and 50+ user inputs. The way you optimize your strategy depends on a couple things:
The state of the current and recent previous market.
The timeframe you trade on.
The types of trades you prefer. (swings, scalps, etc.)
How much risk you are willing to take on.
Risk Basics:
Going off the last bullet point on the list above, risk plays a huge part in how you optimize your strategy, with that being said here are a few general rules of risk as they relate to trades:
The more trades you take on, the more risk you are opening your strategy up to.
If done correctly, more trades will often result in more profit with slightly lower accuracy, and more risk.
The less trades you take on, the easier it is to have higher accuracy because ideally by rooting out the losing trades, you are left with fewer overall trades but mostly winning trades.
Less trades with higher accuracy often result in less profit but will 100% be less risky than the opposite. (More trades, less accurate, more profit, MORE RISK)
Input Basics:
More trades, less trades, more risk, less risk, what does this all mean as it relates to our tool?
The 50+ user inputs that allow you to optimize and create your strategy all effect when the script takes a trade.
Many of the inputs are essentially conditions. By changing these inputs, what you are doing is changing how specific the conditions need to be in order to take a trade.
This is how the inputs tie into the bullet point list above regarding risk and the number of trades you take on. By raising or lowering certain inputs, you are making the conditions more or less specific on when to trade.
Making conditions more specific will allow for less trades to be taken and will often result in a higher win rate, and less associated risk.
Making conditions less specific will allow for more trades to be taken and depending on the state of the market, could result in more profit being realized, but at the same time opens you up to more risk because you are stating a more general set of conditions in order to take a trade.
How does it work?
Our strategy developer tool is based on two simple factors in order to identify specific areas in the market deemed good for trade. They are as follows:
Directional momentum to identify when a move might happen.
A confirmation of the desired move.
Indicators:
The tool gets its information on these two factors from two custom built indicators which are hard coded into the script. These two indicators and the inputs which affect them can be found labeled with Indicator 1 or Indicator 2 in the tool's settings.
When the conditions are met based on the factors of both indicators, it then decides your stop losses and take profits using pivot points.
Indicator 1 is the momentum indicator.
Indicator 2 looks for confirmation of the move.
Hedges:
Since nothing is ever certain when trading, our tool also aims to minimize potential loss before it can happen by incorporating hedges when a signal prints in the opposite direction of the trade you are currently in.
To identify when to hedge, the candles will appear with the opposite color of your original trade. Candles, while in a long trade, appear as green and candles while in a short trade appear as red. While in a long trade the only time red candles will appear is when a hedge occurs and vice versa for shorts.
Example: If you just took a long trade based on a long signal that the script gave off, but a short signal prints off while you are in the long, you are directed to sell half your long position and enter that half into a short position. Since there is now more uncertainty in the long because of the short signal, minimizing your position size and having a smaller position in the opposite direction allows you to cover your bases if the trade moves against you. If it doesn’t move against you and ends up going long as originally intended, you are not to lose any money, likely a small profit or break even when all is said and done.
In order to give the hedges a greater change of hitting, the take profits are smaller than a normal trade, this way even if your hedge wasn’t necessary and the original trade does not move against you, it's likely that your hedge will still win, and you can just consider it a small scalp to further your profits on the original trade.
Doubles:
Besides minimizing loss, we also aim to maximize the potential gain. When a second signal prints off in the direction of the trade you are currently already in, the tool directs you to double your position size.
The signal for doubling is a label with “2x” written inside.
The logic here is similar to hedging but in the opposite way. Just as a signal in the opposite direction creates uncertainty, a signal in the same direction indicates more certainty hence doubling your position size.
Example: If you are currently in a long position and you get a second long signal, you would then double your existing position since two long signals printing off before the first one has a chance to play out indicates a stronger chance of movement in the intended direction of your trade.
User Inputs
Upon opening the tools settings tab, you will find all the user inputs which can then be modified to fit your desired strategy. In this section of our guides, you will find individual explanations and use cases for each input so you can correctly use them to your best advantage.
Strategy Tracker Table:
By ticking this input on, the strategy tracker table will be visible to the user. (Default is on)
Indicator 1 Greater Than: Long:
By ticking this input on, you are adding a condition the script will then look for in order to take a long. (Default is on)
This condition is that an average of indicator 1, which searches for momentum, must fall above a certain level, which is determined in the next input.
The purpose of this is to ensure that the average momentum is not too low because this would indicate prolonged downwards movement on the timeframe of the market being observed, making a long position riskier.
Indicator 1 Greater Than Input: Long:
This input correlates to the previous input directly above.
If Indicator 1 Greater Than: Long is ticked on, then one of the conditions in order to take a long position will be that the average of indicator 1 must fall above the level which you set in this input.
max level 100, min level 0
Indicator 1 Less Than: Long
By ticking this input on, you are adding a condition the script will then look for in order to take a long position. (Default is on)
This condition is that an average of indicator 1, which searches for momentum, must fall below a certain level, which is determined in the next input.
The purpose of this is to ensure that the average momentum is not too high, because this would indicate a prior significant upwards movement or trend on the timeframe of the market being observed.
Taking a long position while the average momentum is at higher levels exposes the risk of longing as the market has started to pull back from a peak or when the market has just reached a peak.
Indicator 1 Less Than Input: Long
This input correlates to the previous input directly above.
If Indicator 1 Less Than: Long is ticked on, then one of the conditions in order to take a long position will be that the average of indicator 1 must fall below the level which you set in this input.
max level 100, min level 0
Indicator 1 Greater Than: Short
By ticking this input on, you are adding a condition the script will then look for in order to take a short. (Default is on)
This condition is that an average of indicator 1, which searches for momentum, must fall above a certain level, which is determined in the next input.
The purpose of this is to ensure that the average momentum is not too low because this would indicate prolonged downwards movement or trend on the timeframe of the market being observed.
Taking a short position while the average momentum is at lower levels exposes the risk of shorting as the market has started to recover from a bottom or when the market has just reached a bottom.
Indicator 1 Greater Than Input: Short
This input correlates to the previous input directly above.
If Indicator 1 Greater Than: Short is ticked on, then one of the conditions in order to take a short position will be that the average of indicator 1 must fall above the level which you set in this input.
max level 100, min level 0
Indicator 1 Less Than: Short
By ticking this input on, you are adding a condition the script will then look for in order to take a short position. (Default is on)
This condition is that an average of indicator 1, which searches for momentum, must fall below a certain level, which is determined in the next input.
The purpose of this is to ensure that the average momentum is not too high, because this would indicate a prior significant upwards movement or trend on the timeframe of the market being observed.
Taking a short position while the average momentum is at higher levels exposes the risk of shorting as the market is currently in a strong uptrend.
Indicator 1 Less Than: Short
This input correlates to the previous input directly above.
If Indicator 1 Less Than: Short is ticked on, then one of the conditions in order to take a short position will be that the average of indicator 1 must fall below the level which you set in this input.
max level 100, min level 0
Summary of Input Group: Indicator 1 Greater/Less Than Long/Short
This grouping of inputs is best used as a filter of sorts, much like many of the other inputs which are also essentially filters of the market to find areas ripe for trade. Specifically, however, this group of inputs is especially powerful because if used correctly, it can specify a range for the average momentum to fall in when looking for either long or short trades. Think of it like a sweet spot where the average is not too high nor too low. In combination with the numerous other inputs which will shortly be explained, this sweet spot can be a great indication. Keep in mind that once you find a working range, this will not last forever. Conditions in the market are ever changing and as such your inputs, in this case the range the average momentum must fall in, will also need to change with the market conditions.
Bars Since Crossover:
This input simply describes a crossover of the momentum indicator (indicator 1) and its average.
In the category How does it work? Two main factors are discussed, the first being directional momentum to determine when an upwards move might happen. The crossover correlated to this input is the directional momentum as mentioned earlier.
As also mentioned in How does it work? The second factor is a confirmation of the desired upwards move. This confirmation is a crossover of the current price and indicator 2 which will be further addressed later on.
What's important to understand about the two key factors at play in regard to Bars Since Crossover is that this input is determining a condition which looks for a certain number of bars prior to the confirmation of indicator 2 which the crossover of momentum and its average has happened on indicator 1.
Example: Bars Since Crossover input is set to 10. This means that the crossover of momentum and its average from indicator 1 must be within 10 bars prior to the confirmation from indicator 2. If this happens then this condition is met for a long position.
Bars Since Crossunder:
This input simply describes a crossunder of the momentum indicator (indicator 1) and its average.
In the category How does it work? Two main factors are discussed, the first being directional momentum to determine when a downwards move might happen. The crossunder correlated to this input is the directional momentum as mentioned earlier.
As also mentioned in How does it work? The second factor is a confirmation of the desired downwards move. This confirmation is a crossunder of the current price and indicator 2 which will be further addressed later on.
What's important to understand about the two key factors at play in regard to Bars Since Crossunder is that this input is determining a condition which looks for a certain number of bars prior to the confirmation of indicator 2 which the crossunder of momentum and its average has happened on indicator 1.
Example: Bars Since Crossunder input is set to 10. This means that the crossunder of momentum and its average from indicator 1 must be within 10 bars prior to the confirmation from indicator 2. If this happens then this condition is met for a short position.
Summary of Input Group: Bars Since Crossover/Crossunder
These two inputs can have a large effect on the types of trades being taken and the risk which your strategy opens up to. The idea is that in order for the two key factors described in How does it work? to be correlated and therefore indicate a strong directional move, the two events must happen within a somewhat small period of time. If the period of time between the two events taking place is too large, then it's riskier for your strategy due to a delay in directional momentum and the necessary confirmation. It's important to note that this “small period of time” is relative to the security you're trading and the timeframe its being trades on. Small could mean 5 bars in some cases or 20 bars in others, this is why our custom back tester exists. So that the process of optimization on different securities and different timeframes is smooth and only requires adjustments to inputs then your own analysis of the back test results.
Indicator 1 Input Long
Defines how strong the upwards momentum needs to be in order to take a long position.
When optimizing your strategy, this input is likely to have some of the most effect on when the script takes a long position.
The reasoning for this is because the level you set for this input is the level which indicator 1 must close above following the crossover of its average.
Example: Indicator 1 Input Long set to 50, this means that when the momentum crosses over its average from indicator 1, upon the close of this crossover the momentum must be above the level 50 in order for this condition to be met to take a long position.
The higher the level, the stronger the upwards momentum must be, and therefore by using higher levels for this input, the script will search for stronger directional moves leaving less chance for the trade to move against you.
Indicator 1 Input Short
Defines how strong the downwards momentum needs to be in order to take a short position.
When optimizing your strategy, this input is likely to have some of the most effect on when the script takes a short position.
The reasoning for this is because the level you set for this input is the level which indicator 1 must close below following the crossunder of its average.
Example: Indicator 1 Input Short set to 40, this means that when the momentum crosses under its average from indicator 1, upon the close of this crossunder the momentum must be below the level 40 in order for this condition to be met to take a short position.
The lower the level, the stronger the downwards momentum must be, and therefore by using lower levels for this input, the script will search for stronger directional moves leaving less chance for the trade to move against you.
Summary of Input Group: Indicator 1 Input Long/Short
These two inputs are so important to your strategy because at the end of the day no matter how you set it up, it's still a momentum-based strategy. With that being said the level of momentum or the strength needed in order to take trades is of course going to be a key decider in the successfulness of the strategy. When optimizing these two inputs make sure to take into account what the overall market conditions are, meaning if it’s a bull market maybe make the momentum needed to take a long slightly less comparatively to the amount needed to take a short, in other words make long conditions less specific and short conditions more specific. Slight variations of this input can have very big effects, even changing it by 1 or 2 can make a major difference. In might even be good to consider starting optimization with these inputs and then work the rest of the strategy out from there. A lot could be said about these inputs and more docs will be added in order to further explain more strategy approaches revolving around them, for now don’t hesitate to ask any questions.
Indicator 2 Red
This input is used as a sort of chop filter at its base level, however if used correctly it can be a much broader filter for what areas of the market you want to trade in.
Indicator 2 shows as either red or green and is used as a confirmation when price crosses over it following the crossover of momentum and its average from indicator 1 to take a long position.
If ticked on, Indicator 2 Red states a condition in order for the script to take a long position. (Default is on)
The condition is that upon the crossover of the current price and Indicator 2, 10 bars ago indicator 2 must have been red.
The reason for this input is because the current color of indicator 2 upon the crossover must also be red. However, this condition is hard coded in and cannot be changed by any input.
This is because the type of trade being targeted is that of a type of reversal or continuation.
If indicator 2 showed green 10 bars ago and is currently red this would indicate that a top was just reached, and price is reversing downwards making this not a good area to take a long.
Another scenario if indicator 2 showed green 10 bars ago and is currently red is that there is currently a sideways trend going on or otherwise known as chop, also not an ideal area to take a long
However, if 10 bars ago indicator 2 was red and it's currently red this would indicate a more prolonged pullback.
If all conditions are met and we know that price has been pulling back, now we can enter a long with more knowledge pointing to price reversing upwards from a downwards trend, or continuing its upwards trend after a pullback.
Indicator 2 Green
This input is used as a sort of chop filter at its base level, however if used correctly it can be a much broader filter for what areas of the market you want to trade in.
Indicator 2 shows as either red or green and is used as a confirmation when price crosses under it following the crossunder of momentum and its average from indicator 1 to take a short position.
If ticked on, Indicator 2 Green states a condition in order for the script to take a short position. (Default is on)
The condition is that upon the crossunder of the current price and Indicator 2, 10 bars ago indicator 2 must have been green.
The reason for this input is because the current color of indicator 2 upon the crossunder must also be green. However, this condition is hard coded in and cannot be changed by any input.
This is because the type of trade being targeted is that of a type of reversal or continuation.
If indicator 2 showed red 10 bars ago and is currently green this would indicate that a bottom was just reached, and price is reversing upwards making this not a good area to take a short.
Another scenario if indicator 2 showed red 10 bars ago and is currently green is that there is currently a sideways trend going on or otherwise known as chop, also not an ideal area to take a short.
However, if 10 bars ago indicator 2 was green and it's currently green this would indicate a more prolonged upwards movement.
If all conditions are met and we know that price has been moving up, now we can enter a short with more knowledge pointing to price reversing downwards from an upwards trend, or continuing its downwards trend after a bounce up.
Summary of Input Group: Indicator 2 Red/Green
Similar to Indicator 1 Greater/Less Than Long/Short, the goal of these inputs is to try to get a picture of what the previous recent market has been doing. By getting this picture it's easier to find different areas of the market more ideal for trades. Different from Indicator 1 Greater/Less Than Long/Short though, Indicator 2 Red/Green is directly correlated to the price action in the market rather than the momentum. By switching these on or off you are setting more or less specific conditions for taking trades. Some markets require this extra condition to lower your risk in your strategy, however others may not.
Pivot Low
This input is used to define the number of bars the script will look back to grab a pivot low when taking a long position.
This pivot low is then used to set the stop loss when entering a long position.
This input is very important and optimizing it correctly can be extremely crucial to your strategies success.
The Strategy Developer tool uses a 1:1 risk to reward ratio when setting your first take profit point, so when the script looks back to get a pivot low based on the input you set, it will then set your first take profit at an equal ratio to the stop loss found from the pivot low.
The goal in optimizing this input is to give enough lookback to find real pivot points where price has reversed off of, but not to give too much lookback where its grabbing previous pivot points unrelated to the current move of momentum the script is giving a long signal from.
Consider the type of trades you're looking for in your strategy and what timeframe you are trying to trade on.
Longer swing trades which aim to catch bigger moves in the market, possibly on higher time frames, may require a further lookback in order to get your take profits in the correct positioning to catch the desired move, and not exit early before the trade has fully played out.
Shorter scalp trades may aim to catch smaller moves and therefore you don’t want to allow for too much risk by having a large stop loss and large take profits as a result.
Pivot Low 2
Pivot low 2 can be thought of as a backup lookback in order to get the correct pivot low.
In an input which will be discussed shortly called Pivot Low Minimum, you can set a minimum percentage for your pivot low to be, if the pivot low does not meet the minimum then the script will look to Pivot Low 2’s input to use as a bar lookback in order to get the correct pivot low.
This input is used because you might find a Pivot Low input that works well for the majority of the trades in your back tested strategy, however, there will always be outliers and when this Pivot Low input falls short of getting the correct level to put your stop losses at, Pivot Low 2 is used.
Pivot Low 2’s input should always be higher than Pivot Low’s input, that way you can allow the script to look back further in time to find the correct level when the minimum is not met.
Pivot High
This input is used to define the number of bars the script will look back to grab a pivot high when taking a short position.
This pivot high is then used to set the stop loss when entering a short position.
This input is very important and optimizing it correctly can be extremely crucial to your strategies success.
The Strategy Developer tool uses a 1:1 risk to reward ratio when setting your first take profit point, so when the script looks back to get a pivot high based on the input you set, it will then set your first take profit at an equal ratio to the stop loss found from the pivot high.
The goal in optimizing this input is to give enough lookback to find real pivot points where price has reversed off of, but not to give too much lookback where its grabbing previous pivot points unrelated to the current move of momentum the script is giving a short signal from.
Consider the type of trades you're looking for in your strategy and what timeframe you are trying to trade on.
Longer swing trades which aim to catch bigger moves in the market, possibly on higher time frames, may require a further lookback in order to get your take profits in the correct positioning to catch the desired move, and not exit early before the trade has fully played out.
Shorter scalp trades may aim to catch smaller moves and therefore you don’t want to allow for too much risk by having a large stop loss and large take profits as a result.
Pivot High 2
Pivot high 2 can be thought of as a backup lookback in order to get the correct pivot high.
In an input which will be discussed shortly called Pivot High Minimum, you can set a minimum percentage for your pivot high to be, if the pivot high does not meet the minimum then the script will look to Pivot High 2’s input to use as a bar lookback in order to get the correct pivot high.
This input is used because you might find a Pivot High input that works well for the majority of the trades in your back tested strategy, however, there will always be outliers and when this Pivot High input falls short of getting the correct level to put your stop losses at, Pivot High 2 is used.
Pivot High 2’s input should always be higher than Pivot High’s input, that way you can allow the script to look back further in time to find the correct level when the minimum is not met.
Pivot Low Risk Tolerance
This input is very important in managing the risk associated with your strategy.
Pivot Low Risk Tolerance is defining a maximum percentage the pivot low can be away from your entry.
Since the pivot low that’s found is assigned to your stop loss and directly affects the placement of your take profits when taking a long position, making sure the pivot low isn’t too far down is crucial.
Depending on the types of trades you're aiming to take, the timeframe you choose to trade on, and the leverage you use in your strategy, you may want to assign a higher risk tolerance or a lower one.
Example: Pivot Low Risk Tolerance input set to 3, this means that when all other conditions are met in order to take a long position, when searching for the pivot low in order to set a stop loss, if the script finds the pivot low is greater than 3% away from the entry point, it will not take the trade.
Pivot High Risk Tolerance
This input is very important in managing the risk associated with your strategy.
Pivot High Risk Tolerance is defining a maximum percentage the pivot high can be away from your entry.
Since the pivot high that’s found is assigned to your stop loss and directly affects the placement of your take profits when taking a short position, making sure the pivot high isn’t too far up is crucial.
Depending on the types of trades you're aiming to take, the timeframe you choose to trade on, and the leverage you use in your strategy, you may want to assign a higher risk tolerance or a lower one.
Example: Pivot High Risk Tolerance input set to 3, this means that when all other conditions are met in order to take a short position, when searching for the pivot high in order to set a stop loss, if the script finds the pivot high is greater than 3% away from the entry point, it will not take the trade.
Pivot Low Minimum
Sometimes when searching for the pivot low, the script's defined lookback may not be enough to find the proper pivot point.
This can cause improper placement of stop losses and take profits and may cause trades to be exited early before they can fully play out in your favor.
Pivot Low Minimum is an input used to combat this problem, when the script finds a pivot low that does not meet the minimum percentage away from the entry point, it will then turn to Pivot Low 2 input in order to gain a further lookback and grab the correct pivot point to set your stop loss and take profits with.
When reading and setting this input, understand that setting it to 1 means there is no minimum, setting it to 0.9 would mean the minimum is a 10% difference between the pivot low and your entry point.
Think of it in terms of decimals and their equivalent percentage, 0.1 is equal to 10%, 0.01 is equal to 1%.
Whatever percentage you want to set for a minimum, convert it to a decimal, then simply subtract it from 1.
Example: Say you desire a 1.5% minimum pivot low and as a result an equivalent stop loss of 1.5% below your long entry and furthermore a take profit 1.5% above your long entry since the script uses a 1:1 ratio. Converting 1.5% to a decimal would give you 0.015, then subtracting it from 1 would give you 0.985, this would be the input assigned to Pivot Low Minimum.
Pivot High Minimum
Sometimes when searching for the pivot high, the script's defined lookback may not be enough to find the proper pivot point.
This can cause improper placement of stop losses and take profits and may cause trades to be exited early before they can fully play out in your favor.
Pivot High Minimum is an input used to combat this problem, when the script finds a pivot high that does not meet the minimum percentage away from the entry point, it will then turn to Pivot High 2 input in order to gain a further lookback and grab the correct pivot point to set your stop loss and take profits with.
When reading and setting this input, understand that setting it to 1 means there is no minimum, setting it to 0.9 would mean the minimum is a 10% difference between the pivot high and your entry point.
Think of it in terms of decimals and their equivalent percentage, 0.1 is equal to 10%, 0.01 is equal to 1%.
Whatever percentage you want to set for a minimum, convert it to a decimal, then simply subtract it from 1.
Example: Say you desire a 1.5% minimum pivot high and as a result an equivalent stop loss of 1.5% above your short entry and furthermore a take profit 1.5% below your short entry since the script uses a 1:1 ratio. Converting 1.5% to a decimal would give you 0.015, then subtracting it from 1 would give you 0.985, this would be the input assigned to Pivot High Minimum.
Summary of Input Group: Pivot Low/High - Pivot Low/High 2 – Pivot Low/High Risk Tolerance – Pivot Low/High Minimum
The first key takeaway from all these inputs is that your stop losses and take profits will be directly affected through optimizing any of them. The second key takeaway is that these inputs are crucial in managing the risk in your strategy, and while this has been said many times throughout the guide for various inputs, when it comes to stop losses and take profits it is especially true. Having a stop loss which is too high opens up the possibility for much bigger losses, and as a result your take profits will also be too high, minimizing the chance of any of them being hit. Having a stop loss which is too low increases the chance that your trade will get stopped out preemptively, before the trade can mature and move in your favor because remember that trades will not always move immediately in the intended direction, a good amount of patience is often involved in creating consistent successful trades and a successful strategy as such. On the same note, too low of a stop loss could also mean you are missing out on unrealized profit since your take profits are a direct result of the stop loss which is found. When optimizing your pivot low/high risk tolerance, think not about how much you are willing to lose on a single trade, but how much your portfolio can actually afford to lose not just on a single trade but multiple trades, sometimes even in a row. Obviously, the goal in creating a strategy is that you avoid losing trades and especially multiple in a row, however, there are many things that can’t be accounted for. The only way to manage this unaccounted risk is to use proper risk management and not open yourself up to big losses even in the worst most unlikely scenarios. Even if you don’t lose multiple trades in a row, ask yourself, could I afford to lose multiple trades with the risk tolerance I have set if everything were to go to $hit, (hopefully it would not), but in the off chance it did, instead of beating yourself up over what you did wrong, you’ll be patting yourself on the back for what you did right.
TP2-4 Long Placement
The first thing to understand about the take profit placement is that our system of stop losses and take profits uses a 1:1 risk to reward ratio for the first stop loss and first take profit.
This means that if your stop loss falls 2% below your long entry, your first take profit will be 2% above your long entry, hence 1:1.
As for take profits 2-4, they are just extensions of that ratio. This means that if TP2 Long Placement is set to 1.5, the ratio for your second take profit is 1:1.5.
Using the same percentage from the second bullet point being 2%, we can now gather that with a 1:1.5 ratio our second take profit would be at 3% above our long entry.
The same applies for the rest of the take profits, meaning whatever the take profit is set at regardless of which one, apply that number to the second placeholder of the ratio.
Example: First stop loss falls 2% below long entry. TP2 Long Placement input set to 1.5; risk to reward ratio is 1:1.5; corresponding percentage would be a 3% gain. TP3 Long Placement input set to 2; risk to reward ratio is 1:2; corresponding percentage would be a 4% gain. TP4 Long Placement input set to 2.5; risk to reward ratio is 1:2.5; corresponding percentage would be a 5% gain.
The next key thing to understand about the trailing take profits system is the position size being sold at each take profit and therefore how the strategy tracker calculates your strategy's profit.
At the first take profit, 50% of your position is being calculated as sold, locking in good profits off the bat.
At TP2, 20% of your position is being calculated as sold, leaving a remaining 30% open to gain more profit.
At TP3, another 20% of your position is being calculated as sold, leaving 10% to collect any additional possible gains.
At TP4 the remaining 10% of your position is sold and the trade will be fully closed out.
SL2-4 Long Placement
Our system of trailing stop losses is completely similar to that of our trailing take profits.
Just like the trailing take profits, the inputs for stop losses 2-4 are also used as the second placeholders in the risk to reward ratio.
This may be confusing since generally stop losses are associated with a loss on your position, however, the only stop loss which results in a loss on your position is the first one, not stop losses 2-4.
This is because once your first take profit is hit on your long, your stop loss will automatically move up to the price equivalent to the ratio which you set using these inputs that lies in profit.
Example: Since your first take profit will always be at a 1:1 risk to reward ratio with your stop loss, your second take profit could be at a 1:0.8 ratio. So, to clarify, once your first take profit is hit at a 1:1, your original first stop loss will now be moved up in profits to just below your first take profit at a 1:0.8 risk to reward ratio. This only happens AFTER the first take profit is hit.
For stop losses 3 and 4, the same logic is true, once TP2 is hit, your second stop loss will now be moved up to the placement of SL3 which will fall somewhere below TP2. Once TP3 is hit, your third stop loss will now be moved up to the placement of SL4 which will fall somewhere below TP3. If stop loss 4 does not get hit, then the only thing left to happen is for TP4 to hit and the trade will fully close out.
The one major difference between our system of trailing stop losses and take profits is that no matter what stop loss is hit, the entire remainder of your position will be calculated as sold.
So, if your first take profit hits and sells 50% of your long position, but the trade does not continue upwards and moves down to your second stop loss, the remaining 50% of your position will be calculated as sold.
The same applies to SL3 and SL4, so at SL3 the remaining 30% of your position will be calculated as sold, and at SL4 the remaining 10% will be calculated as sold.
Your trailing stop loss placement is dependent on what types of trades you desire. For shorter scalps on smaller timeframes, it's recommended to place each stop loss just below each corresponding take profit for long trades.
This way you leave just enough room for the trade to continue upwards if there is enough momentum, but you don’t open yourself up to losing your unrealized profit if it does not make this continuation.
If you desire longer swing trades on higher timeframes, it might be a good idea to leave more room in between the take profit and corresponding stop loss.
This way you leave more room for the trade to mature and move in your favor since when trading longer moves, often they will not shoot straight up but rather have a series of small pullbacks throughout the more general upwards trend.
Note that when a long trade is first entered the only stop loss and take profit in play are your original stop loss found by the pivot low which would result in a loss, and the first take profit at a 1:1 risk to reward ratio from that pivot low.
TP2-4 Short Placement
The first thing to understand about the take profit placement is that our system of stop losses and take profits uses a 1:1 risk to reward ratio for the first stop loss and first take profit.
This means that if your stop loss falls 2% above your short entry, your first take profit will be 2% below your short entry, hence, 1:1.
As for take profits 2-4, they are just extensions of that ratio. This means that if TP2 Short Placement is set to 1.5, the ratio for your second take profit is 1:1.5.
Using the same percentage from the second bullet point being 2%, we can now gather that with a 1:1.5 ratio our second take profit would be at 3% below our short entry.
The same applies for the rest of the take profits, meaning whatever the take profit is set at regardless of which one, apply that number to the second placeholder of the ratio.
Example: First stop loss falls 2% above short entry. TP2 Short Placement input set to 1.5; risk to reward ratio is 1:1.5; corresponding percentage would be a 3% gain. TP3 Short Placement input set to 2; risk to reward ratio is 1:2; corresponding percentage would be a 4% gain. TP4 Short Placement input set to 2.5; risk to reward ratio is 1:2.5; corresponding percentage would be a 5% gain.
The next key thing to understand about the trailing take profits system is the position size being sold at each take profit and therefore how the strategy tracker calculates your strategy's profit.
At the first take profit, 50% of your position is being calculated as sold, locking in good profits off the bat.
At TP2, 20% of your position is being calculated as sold, leaving a remaining 30% open to gain more profit.
At TP3, another 20% of your position is being calculated as sold, leaving 10% to collect any additional possible gains.
At TP4 the remaining 10% of your position is sold and the trade will be fully closed out.
SL2-4 Short Placement
Our system of trailing stop losses is completely similar to that of our trailing take profits.
Just like the trailing take profits, the inputs for stop losses 2-4 are also used as the second placeholders in the risk to reward ratio.
This may be confusing since generally stop losses are associated with a loss on your position, however, the only stop loss which results in a loss on your position is the first one, not stop losses 2-4.
This is because once your first take profit is hit on your short, your stop loss will automatically move down to the price equivalent to the ratio which you set using these inputs that lies in profit.
Example: Since your first take profit will always be at a 1:1 risk to reward ratio with your stop loss, your second take profit could be at a 1:0.8 ratio. So, to clarify, once your first take profit is hit at a 1:1, your original first stop loss will now be moved down in profits to just below your first take profit at a 1:0.8 risk to reward ratio. This only happens AFTER the first take profit is hit.
For stop losses 3 and 4, the same logic is true, once TP2 is hit, your second stop loss will now be moved down to the placement of SL3 which will fall somewhere above TP2. Once TP3 is hit, your third stop loss will now be moved down to the placement of SL4 which will fall somewhere above TP3. If stop loss 4 does not get hit, then the only thing left to happen is for TP4 to hit and the trade will fully close out.
The one major difference between our system of trailing stop losses and take profits is that no matter what stop loss is hit, the entire remainder of your position will be calculated as sold.
So, if your first take profit hits and sells 50% of your short position, but the trade does not continue downwards and moves up to your second stop loss, the remaining 50% of your position will be calculated as sold.
The same applies to SL3 and SL4, so at SL3 the remaining 30% of your position will be calculated as sold, and at SL4 the remaining 10% will be calculated as sold.
Your trailing stop loss placement is dependent on what types of trades you desire. For shorter scalps on smaller timeframes, it's recommended to place each stop loss just above each corresponding take profit for short trades.
This way you leave just enough room for the trade to continue downwards if there is enough momentum, but you don’t open yourself up to losing your unrealized profit if it does not make this continuation.
If you desire longer swing trades on higher timeframes, it might be a good idea to leave more room in between the take profit and corresponding stop loss.
This way you leave more room for the trade to mature and move in your favor since when trading longer moves, often they will not shoot straight down but rather have a series of small bounces throughout the more general downwards trend.
Note that when a short trade is first entered the only stop loss and take profit in play are your original stop loss found by the pivot high which would result in a loss, and the first take profit at a 1:1 risk to reward ratio from that pivot high.
Summary of Take Profit/Stop Loss Placement:
Correctly placed take profits and stop losses are essential in having a successful strategy and proper risk management. With that being said there are also many ways in which to use this system. Deciding how to set them up is really just a matter of determining the trading style you aim to succeed with. Once this has been determined, the placement of take profits and stop losses should be easier to configure. However, if there is any confusion on either of these topics as the ratios and corresponding TP/SL can get confusing, please do not hesitate to ask further questions in our discord!
Leverage Long
Leverage Long input simply defines the leverage used in your long positions, and is used in calculating the profit in Strategy Tracker
A rundown of risk associated with using leverage will not be given here since it should assume that if you're using leverage, you should already understand the risks.
If you are not using any leverage, then set Leverage Long input to 1.
Long Position Size
This input defines the position size you are using in your long trades.
This input is also used in calculating profit in Strategy Tracker.
Long Hedge Position Size
This input is used to define the position size of long hedge positions.
This input is also used in calculating profit in Strategy Tracker.
Important: Your Long Hedge Position Size should always be half of your Long Position Size for accurate profit calculation.
Double Long Position Size
This input is used to define the position size when in a double long.
This input is also used in calculating profit in Strategy Tracker
Important: Your Double Long Position Size should always be double your Long Position Size for accurate profit calculation.
Short Position Size
This input defines the position size you are using in your short trades.
This input is also used in calculating profit in Strategy Tracker.
Short Hedge Position Size
This input is used to define the position size of short hedge positions.
This input is also used in calculating profit in Strategy Tracker.
Important: Your Short Hedge Position Size should always be half of your Short Position Size for accurate profit calculation.
Double Short Position Size
This input is used to define the position size when in a double short.
This input is also used in calculating profit in Strategy Tracker
Important: Your Double Short Position Size should always be double your Short Position Size for accurate profit calculation.
A Message From the Developer PLEASE READ!!!
If you have made it this far in the guide, I applaud you and thank you for sticking with it as I know there is a lot of information here! This is not an exaggeration when I say there are hundreds of millions of possible variations that could be applied throughout all the inputs which is why I much prefer to call this a tool rather than an algorithm. Algorithm is a loaded word in my opinion as it comes with an implication of guarantee in the trades being made. This is not meant to discourage anybody from taking trades based off the tool which is also why I provided the option for automated alerts which through third party software can turn into automated trades; if you have the confidence in your strategy by all means I encourage you to trade it, automated or not. Just please understand that it's highly recommended to also apply your own knowledge and analysis before taking a trade as historical back testing data has its limitations and cannot always account for current market conditions. The real applicability does not fall in what the back tester window is saying you would have made or how accurate your strategy would have been, it's within the sheer number of markets and scenarios this tool can be used in and the information you can get which a human just can’t comprehend all at once; its literally endless. I urge all of you to be creative and think outside the box about what you can do with such a powerful tool at your fingertips. After all this is the reason why so many inputs were provided. Another main goal of this project was to give users a better understanding of risk management. It can be hard to manage your risk when it’s all kept in your head, but when you can modify your strategy to better manage your risk by simply optimizing a few inputs, it’s a lot easier to comprehend and actually apply when trading. The last thing I want to say is have fun working through the possible learning curve in using this tool, it may be a process but enjoy it because the one thing I can guarantee is that you will come out the other side a better trader than before!
Self-Optimizing RSI Strategy [Kioseff Trading]Hello!
Introducing the Self-Optimizing RSI Strategy.
The indicator tests up to 800 RSI strategies simultaneously, looping through arrays, and auto plots the best performing parameter set.
The image above shows the result of 800 RSI strategies concurrently.
The table oriented bottom right shows the performance and risk metrics of the best performing RSI system tested across the bar set. Additionally, the conditions for entry and exit are displayed; for the image - a long entry system predicated on RSI crossunders and exit system predicated on a 1% TP and 2% SL are shown.
The indicator calculates numerous risk and performance metrics.
Calculated metrics include:
RSI Parameters
RSI Cross Entry Level
Total Trades
Win Rate
Avg. Gain for Winning Trades
Max Pain
PnL (Cumulative Performance)
Profit Factor
Avg. Loss for Losing Trades
Ratio Avg. Win / Avg. Loss
Avg. Bars in Trade
Max Drawdown
Current Drawdown
Open Position PnL
"Dynamic" indicates the performance of self-optimizing RSI system was tested.
The image above shows the performance of the greatest-performing RSI system - a fixed set of parameters - when adhering to a 1% TP and 2% fixed SL.
Trailing Stops and Profit-Taking Limit orders can be set/simulated.
The image above shows a dynamic entry level - plotted as a purple, non-transparent line.
The entry level "self-optimizes" to mimic the best performing RSI system at current time.
The image above exemplifies the functionality for all horizontal lines plotted on the chart.
The average RSI level achieved subsequent a profitable trade is shown.
The average RSI level achieved subsequent a losing trade is shown.
The entry level for RSI crossunders/crossovers is shown.
The image above show the Self-Optimizing RSI indicator recording entries & exits; gains & losses, for each executed trade.
You can "verify" trades manually.
Blue boxes reflect an entered position.
Green boxes reflect a closed, profitable trade.
Red boxes reflect a close, losing trade.
The percentage gain for a profitable trade is appended to green boxes; the percentage loss for a losing trade is appended to red boxes.
The Self-Optimizing RSI indicator plots off the chart; however, percentage gains/losses are measured against price, not RSI.
Boxes correlate to the interval a trade was entered/exited on.
The indicator hosts various methods to filter the outcome for testing.
For instance, you can:
Use trailing stops or fixed stop losses
Test RSI crossunders and crossovers
Configure the RSI settings that are tested (i.e. RSI 2 - 9, RSI 14 - 20, RSI 50 - 57)
Test short-based RSI Systems and long-based RSI systems
Simulate limit orders (Exit intrabar at fixed stop losses or trailing stop losses; exit intrabar at profit targets)
Require all tested RSIs to trend above or below their respective average (i.e. all RSIs must trend above/below their 50-interval EMA values. SMAs can also be used)
Use external indicators and require a user-defined value be exceeded, measured below, or that price exceed or measure below an indicator. The Self-Optimizing RSI indicator incorporates a few built-in technical indicators - ADX, %k, MFI, CMFI, and RSI. Consequently, you can require these indicators to measure above/below a specified level prior to entry. Additionally, you can supplement an extrinsic indicator (anything custom coded with plot values) to the entry logic for the Self-Optimizing RSI indicator. I'll show an example shortly.
Adjust the time window that's tested.
Adjust PT and SL percentages.
Override plot an RSI system to procure thorough statistics.
Require a symbol to measure above/Below or equal to a particular price level to “validate” a Long/Short entry signal. You can retrieve any data hosted by TradingView and require it measure above/below a user-defined level prior to entry. For instance, you can select "$VIX", and require the ticker to measure less than $30 prior to long/short entry. If "$VIX" measures greater than $30 prior to a long/short signal the position will not open. Alternatively, you can require a symbol to measure above a user-defined price prior to entry. If the retrieved ticker doesn't measure above the user-defined level prior to entry a trade will not open.
Use trailing stops or fixed stop losses
The image above shows results for 800 short-based RSI systems - using a trailing stop loss.
Test RSI crossunders and crossovers
The image shows results for 800 long-based RSI systems. Positions are entered subsequent to RSI crossovers.
You can select which RSI strategies are tested - you aren't not limited to testing RSI 2 - RSI 9 (:
Simulate limit orders (Exit intrabar at fixed stop losses or trailing stop losses; exit intrabar at profit targets)
The image above shows performance test results when exiting during the interval subsequent to the profit target being exceeded.
The image above shows performance test results when exiting during the interval subsequent to the stop loss being exceeded.
Require all tested RSIs to trend above or below their respective average (i.e. all RSIs must trend above/below their 50-interval EMA values. SMAs can also be used)
The image above shows an RSI EMA in addition to prerequisite condition. For each RSI strategy tested, the RSI used for the strategy must measure above an EMA of its values prior to entry. You can require RSI to measure below an EMA of its values prior to entry, use an SMA, and change the length of the MA used.
Use external indicators and require a user-defined value be exceeded, measured below, or that price exceed or measure below an indicator. The Self-Optimizing RSI indicator incorporates a few built-in technical indicators - ADX, %k, MFI, CMFI, and RSI. Consequently, you can require these indicators to measure above/below a specified level prior to entry. Additionally, you can supplement an extrinsic indicator (anything custom coded with plot values) to the entry logic for the Self-Optimizing RSI indicator. I'll show an example shortly.
The image above shows me requiring the ADX indicator to measure above "20" prior to long entry. Any of the built-indicators can be used with similar conditions; you can implement a custom-coded indicator for trade logic.
Additionally, you can supplement an extrinsic indicator (anything custom coded with plot values) to the entry logic for the Self-Optimizing RSI indicator.
The image above shows me retrieving the value for Volume Profile Point of Control - a TradingView coded indicator.
Consequently, I can require price to measure above/below the session's Poc prior to RSI long/short entry.
You can use this feature with any custom coded indicator providing historical plot values - something you or a favored author have coded.
]Adjust PT and SL percentages
The image above shows adjusted TP & SL percentages - optimize and reward/risk ratio you'd like (:
Override plot an RSI system to procure thorough statistics.
The image above shows manually plotted RSI parameters and a corresponding stat sheet.
Require a symbol to measure above/Below or equal to a particular price level to “validate” a Long/Short entry signal. You can retrieve any data hosted by TradingView and require it measure above/below a user-defined level prior to entry. For instance, you can select "$VIX", and require the ticker to measure less than $30 prior to long/short entry. If "$VIX" measures greater than $30 prior to a long/short signal the position will not open. Alternatively, you can require a symbol to measure above a user-defined price prior to entry. If the retrieved ticker doesn't measure above the user-defined level prior to entry a trade will not open.
The image above shows me requiring the ticker "$VIX" to measure below $30 prior to long/short entry. If %VIS measures greater than $30 when a long/short signal triggers a position will not be opened. Further refine your trading system with this feature - exploit correlations.
Adjust the time window that's tested.
The image above shows configurable start and end dates for the optimization period.
You won't be able to test 800 RSI strategies concomitantly on a 20,000 bar data set.
Consequently, for large data sets (intrasession data) you will have to narrow the optimization window to test a larger number of combinations.
You can test 80 (loads on all data sets), 144 (loads on all data sets), 264 (loads on ~15,000 bar data sets), 312 (loads on ~11,500 bar data sets) and 800 (loads on ~4950 bar data sets)combinations simultaneously. You can test 800 RSI strategies simultaneously on intrasession data; however, you'll likely have to narrow the tested time window.
I recently published a bar count script titled "Bar Count for Backtesting", you can access the script here:
The above script is useful for quickly calculating the number of bars in a time window, or the date for a bar that is "x" number of bars back. Therefore, implementing these scripts cooperatively should improve date selection efficiency (not arbitrarily selecting test start & end dates that fail to load).
I included a tool tip describing the near-maximum bars in a data set that the higher numbers of simultaneous RSI strategies can be tested on.
More to come; enjoy!
(P.S. The script uses private libraries and, consequently, is unable to be published open source)
An optimization script is best implemented to discover what won't work, not what will work. The best performing "optimized" parameters are not a guaranteed profitable investment system. While we may see an exceptionally positive performance for a set of parameters, it's impossible to know how much of that performance is the beneficiary of market noise in the absence of additional testing. Most market moves are noise - irreplicable sequences that offer no predictive utility - and most "good" backtests overwhelmingly benefit from these irreplicable sequences. An investor unfamiliar with this concept may be lead to believe they have found a valid correlation between an indicator sequence and subsequent price movement, despite the correlation being illusory.
Consequently, it should be assumed that the best performing parameters strongly benefitted from market noise and will not work in a live market - until further rigorous statistical tests are performed on an investment system built around the best performing parameters. This includes out-of-sample, in-sample, and forward testing in addition to testing negatively correlated, positively correlated and zero-correlation assets; testing additional assets should be treated as prerequisite to live implementation.
Of course, all trading strategies, even one's that methodically exploit a valid correlation/replicable sequence, will benefit from market noise - it's impossible to avoid. However, a "legit" trading strategy has a chance to work on future price data, while an overoptimized strategy will fail miserably on new price data!
An overoptimized strategy is virtually guaranteed to have a better backtest performance than a valid strategy. The overoptimized strategy will fail in a live market while the valid strategy has a chance of working. So, should you notice the best performing RSI parameters, be sure to build a comprehensive trading system around the parameters and perform additional tests. This is the only way to know if the optimized parameters will truly work in a live market!
Unfortunately, they often will not!
This publication does not constitute investment advice.
🏦 Institutional Smart Money Tracker_NEIL_BILLIONAIRE✅ INSTITUTIONAL SMART MONEY TRACKER V6 - COMPLETE
Here's what makes this institutional-grade and prevents wrong-direction trades:
🎯 CRITICAL ANTI-WRONG-DIRECTION FEATURES:
🏦 MASTER INSTITUTIONAL BIAS - Dashboard shows:
Strong Bullish (3-4 HTFs bullish) = ⚠️ ONLY TAKE LONG TRADES
Strong Bearish (3-4 HTFs bearish) = ⚠️ ONLY TAKE SHORT TRADES
Neutral = ⚠️ WAIT FOR CLEAR DIRECTION
🚨 BACKGROUND COLOR ALERTS:
Green tint = Strong bullish environment (safe to long)
Red tint = Strong bearish environment (safe to short)
Orange tint = DANGER ZONE - mixed signals, DON'T TRADE!
📊 MULTI-TIMEFRAME CONFIRMATION:
Analyzes 4 higher timeframes (15m, 1H, 4H, Daily by default)
Only generates signals when aligned with HTF trends
Shows trend strength for each timeframe
🎨 VISUAL ELEMENTS:
Green boxes = IDM bullish order blocks (demand zones)
Red boxes = IDM bearish order blocks (supply zones)
Blue/Orange boxes = EXT HTF order blocks
Aqua/Fuchsia boxes = Fair Value Gaps
Yellow boxes = Accumulation zones
Orange boxes = Distribution zones
⚠️ labels = Manipulation detected
💥 bubbles = High volume institutional activity
BOS/CHOCH labels = Market structure changes
🟢 LONG / 🔴 SHORT = Trade signals with full TP/SL levels
📋 DASHBOARD SHOWS:
Master institutional bias (color-coded)
Current timeframe trend + strength
4 HTF trends + strength levels
Market structure status
Volume analysis
Active trade with entry/SL/TP1/TP2/TP3
⚙️ EVERYTHING IS CUSTOMIZABLE:
Individual on/off toggles for all features
Colors, sizes, periods, thresholds
Dashboard position
HTF selections
Risk/reward ratios
🔔 8 BUILT-IN ALERTS:
Long signal
Short signal
Break of Structure
Change of Character
Manipulation detected
High volume spikes
Even when drunk/stoned, the massive dashboard + colored backgrounds make it IMPOSSIBLE to trade the wrong direction! 🎯
This is New Year's 2026 gift to fellow ♥ newbie traders, who are still learning to decode the market moves(♥just like me♥).
🏦 INSTITUTIONAL SMART MONEY TRACKER - COMPLETE TUTORIAL
📋 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Installation
Understanding the Dashboard
Visual Elements Guide
How to Read Signals
Trading Strategy
Settings Customization
Real Trading Examples
🚀 1. INSTALLATION {#installation}
Step 1: Copy the Code
Click on the artifact above and copy ALL the Pine Script code
Step 2: Open TradingView
Go to TradingView.com
Open any chart (BTC, ETH, stocks, forex, etc.)
Step 3: Open Pine Editor
Click "Pine Editor" at the bottom of the screen
Click "Open" → "New blank indicator"
Step 4: Paste & Save
Delete all existing code
Paste the copied indicator code
Click "Save" (give it a name like "Institutional SMT")
Click "Add to Chart"
Step 5: Initial Setup
The indicator will load with default settings
You'll see a dashboard in the top-right corner
Order blocks, FVGs, and zones will appear on the chart
📊 2. UNDERSTANDING THE DASHBOARD {#dashboard}
🏦 INSTITUTIONAL BIAS (TOP SECTION)
****** This is the MOST IMPORTANT section - it prevents wrong-direction trades!******
🟢 STRONG BULLISH = 3-4 higher timeframes bullish
→ ONLY TAKE LONG TRADES
🟡 BULLISH = 2 higher timeframes bullish
→ Prefer long trades, be cautious
🔴 STRONG BEARISH = 3-4 higher timeframes bearish
→ ONLY TAKE SHORT TRADES
🟠 BEARISH = 2 higher timeframes bearish
→ Prefer short trades, be cautious
⚪ NEUTRAL = Mixed signals
→ STAY OUT! Don't trade!
```
### **⚠️ WARNING MESSAGE**
- **"ONLY TAKE LONG TRADES"** = All HTFs aligned bullish
- **"ONLY TAKE SHORT TRADES"** = All HTFs aligned bearish
- **"WAIT FOR CLEAR DIRECTION"** = Don't trade yet!
### **CURRENT TIMEFRAME**
Shows your current chart's trend:
- **UP** = Bullish structure
- **DOWN** = Bearish structure
- **SIDE** = Sideways/choppy
**STRENGTH:**
- **STRONG** = ADX > 25 (trending market)
- **MEDIUM** = ADX 20-25 (moderate trend)
- **WEAK** = ADX < 20 (choppy/ranging)
### **HIGHER TIMEFRAMES (HTF)**
Displays 4 higher timeframes (default: 15m, 1H, 4H, Daily):
- **15m** = Short-term trend
- **1H** = Intraday trend
- **4H** = Swing trend
- **D** = Major trend
Each shows:
- Direction (UP/DOWN/SIDE)
- Strength (STRONG/MEDIUM/WEAK)
### **MARKET STRUCTURE**
- **BULLISH** = Higher highs and higher lows
- **BEARISH** = Lower highs and lower lows
- Shows last structure event (BOS/CHOCH)
### **VOLUME**
- **HIGH 💥** = Institutional activity detected
- **NORMAL** = Average volume
- Shows volume multiplier (e.g., "2.5x" = 2.5 times average)
### **ACTIVE SIGNAL**
- **🟢 LONG** = Active long trade with entry/SL/TP levels
- **🔴 SHORT** = Active short trade with entry/SL/TP levels
- **NO ACTIVE TRADE** = Waiting for setup
---
## 🎨 **3. VISUAL ELEMENTS GUIDE** {#visual-elements}
### **📦 ORDER BLOCKS**
**🟢 GREEN BOXES (Bullish IDM Order Blocks)**
- Last bearish candle before strong bullish move
- Demand zone where institutions bought
- Price often bounces here
- **Thicker border** = Unmitigated (not tested yet) → High probability zone
**🔴 RED BOXES (Bearish IDM Order Blocks)**
- Last bullish candle before strong bearish move
- Supply zone where institutions sold
- Price often rejects here
- **Thicker border** = Unmitigated (not tested yet) → High probability zone
**🔷 BLUE BOXES (EXT Bullish Order Blocks)**
- Higher timeframe demand zones
- Stronger support levels
- Dashed border = HTF zone
**🟠 ORANGE BOXES (EXT Bearish Order Blocks)**
- Higher timeframe supply zones
- Stronger resistance levels
- Dashed border = HTF zone
### **📊 FAIR VALUE GAPS (FVGs)**
**💠 AQUA BOXES (Bullish FVG)**
- Gap between price movement (inefficiency)
- Price tends to fill these gaps
- Buy zone when price returns
**💜 FUCHSIA BOXES (Bearish FVG)**
- Gap between price movement (inefficiency)
- Price tends to fill these gaps
- Sell zone when price returns
**🟡 YELLOW BOXES (Inverted FVG)**
- FVG that got filled and now acts as support/resistance
- Becomes a key level for future trades
### **⚡ BREAKER BLOCKS**
**BB Labels (Green/Red dotted lines)**
- Failed order blocks that flipped
- Was support, became resistance (or vice versa)
- Strong reversal zones
### **🎯 SMART MONEY ZONES**
**🟡 ACCUMULATION BOXES**
- Consolidation + increasing volume + bullish structure
- Institutions accumulating positions
- Expect bullish breakout
**🟠 DISTRIBUTION BOXES**
- Consolidation + increasing volume + bearish structure
- Institutions distributing/selling
- Expect bearish breakdown
**⚠️ MANIPULATION Labels**
- Large wicks + high volume
- Stop hunt detected
- Watch for reversal
### **💥 VOLUME BUBBLES**
- **Green bubble** = High volume bullish candle (institutional buying)
- **Red bubble** = High volume bearish candle (institutional selling)
- Shows volume multiplier (e.g., "3.2x")
### **📈 MARKET STRUCTURE**
**Small triangles:**
- 🔺 Green triangle below = Swing low
- 🔻 Red triangle above = Swing high
**BOS Labels (Green/Red)**
- Break of Structure
- Trend continuation signal
- **Green BOS** = Bullish continuation
- **Red BOS** = Bearish continuation
**CHOCH Labels (Blue/Orange)**
- Change of Character
- Potential trend reversal
- **Blue CHOCH** = Shift to bullish
- **Orange CHOCH** = Shift to bearish
### **⚠️ DIVERGENCE SIGNALS**
**🔼 BULL DIV (Green label below)**
- Price makes lower low, RSI makes higher low
- Bullish reversal signal
- Strong at oversold levels (RSI < 35)
**🔽 BEAR DIV (Red label above)**
- Price makes higher high, RSI makes lower high
- Bearish reversal signal
- Strong at overbought levels (RSI > 65)
### **🚨 BACKGROUND COLORS**
**Light Green Background**
- 3-4 HTFs bullish + strong trend
- Safe to take long trades
- High confidence environment
**Light Red Background**
- 3-4 HTFs bearish + strong trend
- Safe to take short trades
- High confidence environment
**Light Orange Background**
- Mixed signals across timeframes
- **DANGER ZONE - STAY OUT!**
- Wait for clarity
---
## 🎯 **4. HOW TO READ SIGNALS** {#signals}
### **🟢 LONG SIGNAL GENERATION**
Signal appears when ALL conditions met:
1. ✅ Market structure is bullish (uptrend)
2. ✅ Bullish order block formed
3. ✅ Price above last swing low
4. ✅ RSI < 65 (not overbought)
5. ✅ Volume > 1.2x average
**What You'll See:**
- **🟢 LONG** label at entry point
- Blue line = Entry price
- Red line = Stop loss
- Green dashed lines = TP1, TP2
- Green solid line = TP3 (final target)
**Dashboard Shows:**
- Entry price
- Stop loss level
- TP1 (40% target by default)
- TP2 (70% target by default)
- TP3 (100% target = 2:1 R:R by default)
### **🔴 SHORT SIGNAL GENERATION**
Signal appears when ALL conditions met:
1. ✅ Market structure is bearish (downtrend)
2. ✅ Bearish order block formed
3. ✅ Price below last swing high
4. ✅ RSI > 35 (not oversold)
5. ✅ Volume > 1.2x average
**What You'll See:**
- **🔴 SHORT** label at entry point
- Blue line = Entry price
- Red line = Stop loss
- Green dashed lines = TP1, TP2
- Green solid line = TP3 (final target)
---
## 📈 **5. TRADING STRATEGY** {#strategy}
### **🎓 THE GOLDEN RULES (FOLLOW THESE!)**
#### **Rule #1: MASTER BIAS IS LAW**
```
IF Dashboard shows "🟢 STRONG BULLISH":
✅ Take LONG trades ONLY
❌ Ignore all short signals
IF Dashboard shows "🔴 STRONG BEARISH":
✅ Take SHORT trades ONLY
❌ Ignore all long signals
IF Dashboard shows "⚪ NEUTRAL":
❌ DON'T TRADE
⏰ Wait for alignment
```
#### **Rule #2: Trade WITH Higher Timeframes**
- Check all 4 HTFs in dashboard
- Need at least 2-3 HTFs aligned
- More alignment = higher probability
#### **Rule #3: Use Order Blocks for Entry**
- Wait for price to return to unmitigated OB
- Enter when price touches thick-border box
- Best entries = HTF order block + Current TF order block overlap
#### **Rule #4: Confirm with Volume**
- Wait for 💥 volume bubble at entry
- High volume = institutional participation
- No volume = wait for confirmation
#### **Rule #5: Respect Market Structure**
- Don't fight BOS (continuation)
- Be cautious near CHOCH (reversal)
- Wait for structure to stabilize
### **📝 STEP-BY-STEP TRADING PROCESS**
#### **STEP 1: Check Dashboard**
```
1. Look at INSTITUTIONAL BIAS
- Green = Go long only
- Red = Go short only
- Orange/Gray = Stay out
2. Check HTF alignment
- Count how many HTFs aligned
- Need 2+ for good trades
- Need 3+ for best trades
3. Check current trend strength
- STRONG = good trending moves
- WEAK = choppy, reduce size
```
#### **STEP 2: Identify Key Zones**
```
1. Mark unmitigated order blocks (thick borders)
2. Note FVG zones (aqua/fuchsia boxes)
3. Watch for accumulation/distribution zones
4. Mark breaker blocks (dotted lines)
```
#### **STEP 3: Wait for Signal**
```
IF Bullish Bias:
✅ Wait for price to pull back to:
- Bullish order block (green box)
- Bullish FVG (aqua box)
- Support structure
✅ Wait for 🟢 LONG signal label
✅ Confirm with:
- Volume bubble (💥)
- BOS label (continuation)
- No bearish divergence
IF Bearish Bias:
✅ Wait for price to rally to:
- Bearish order block (red box)
- Bearish FVG (fuchsia box)
- Resistance structure
✅ Wait for 🔴 SHORT signal label
✅ Confirm with:
- Volume bubble (💥)
- BOS label (continuation)
- No bullish divergence
```
#### **STEP 4: Execute Trade**
```
1. Enter at signal (🟢 LONG or 🔴 SHORT label)
2. Set stop loss at red line
3. Set take profits:
- TP1 at first dashed green line (40%)
- TP2 at second dashed green line (70%)
- TP3 at solid green line (100%)
4. Trail stop loss after TP1 hit
```
#### **STEP 5: Manage Trade**
```
1. Move SL to breakeven after TP1 hit
2. Take partial profits at each TP level
3. Let remaining position run to TP3
4. Exit immediately if:
- Dashboard bias changes
- CHOCH appears (trend reversal)
- Manipulation label appears
```
### **💎 ADVANCED STRATEGIES**
#### **Strategy 1: Order Block Retest**
```
1. Wait for strong move (BOS)
2. Wait for pullback to unmitigated OB
3. Enter when price touches OB + signal appears
4. SL below OB (longs) or above OB (shorts)
5. Target next OB or swing point
```
#### **Strategy 2: FVG Fill**
```
1. Identify large FVG (aqua/fuchsia box)
2. Wait for price to return to FVG
3. Enter when price enters FVG + signal appears
4. SL beyond FVG
5. Target 50-100% FVG fill
```
#### **Strategy 3: Accumulation Breakout**
```
1. Wait for ACCUMULATION box to form
2. Wait for price to break out with volume
3. Enter on retest of breakout level
4. SL inside accumulation zone
5. Target measured move (height of box)
```
#### **Strategy 4: Manipulation Fade**
```
1. Wait for ⚠️ MANIPULATION label
2. Wait for price to reverse (wick rejection)
3. Enter opposite direction with signal
4. SL beyond manipulation wick
5. Target previous swing point
```
#### **Strategy 5: Divergence Reversal**
```
1. Wait for 🔼 BULL DIV or 🔽 BEAR DIV
2. Confirm with CHOCH (structure break)
3. Enter on OB retest after divergence
4. SL beyond divergence low/high
5. Target opposite side structure
```
---
## ⚙️ **6. SETTINGS CUSTOMIZATION** {#settings}
### **📦 ORDER BLOCKS**
```
🟢 Show IDM Order Blocks: ON/OFF
- Toggle immediate timeframe order blocks
- Customize colors (default: green/red 85% transparency)
🔷 Show EXT Order Blocks: ON/OFF
- Toggle higher timeframe order blocks
- Customize colors (default: blue/orange 90% transparency)
⚡ Show Breaker Blocks: ON/OFF
- Toggle failed order blocks
🎯 Highlight Unmitigated OBs: ON/OFF
- Makes untested blocks thicker (RECOMMENDED: ON)
→ Extend Order Blocks: ON/OFF
- Extends boxes to the right
Max OBs to Display: 1-50
- How many order blocks to show (default: 10)
```
### **📊 FAIR VALUE GAPS**
```
Show Fair Value Gaps: ON/OFF
Show Inverted FVGs: ON/OFF
Bullish FVG Color: Customize (default: aqua)
Bearish FVG Color: Customize (default: fuchsia)
Min FVG Size %: 0.01+
- Minimum gap size to display (default: 0.1%)
```
### **📈 MARKET STRUCTURE**
```
Show Market Structure: ON/OFF
- Swing highs/lows triangles
Mark BOS: ON/OFF
- Break of Structure labels
Mark CHOCH: ON/OFF
- Change of Character labels
Swing Detection Length: 3-50
- Sensitivity (default: 10)
- Lower = more swings
- Higher = major swings only
Label Size: tiny/small/normal
- Size of structure labels
```
### **🎯 SMART MONEY ZONES**
```
Show Accumulation Zones: ON/OFF
Show Distribution Zones: ON/OFF
Show Manipulation Zones: ON/OFF
Accumulation Detection Period: 10+
- Lookback period (default: 20)
Manipulation Wick Threshold: 1.0+
- Wick size multiplier (default: 1.5)
```
### **📊 VOLUME ANALYSIS**
```
Show Volume Analysis: ON/OFF
Show High Volume Bubbles: ON/OFF
Volume Threshold: 1.0+
- Multiplier for high volume (default: 2.0)
- 2.0 = 2x average volume
Volume MA Period: 5+
- Moving average length (default: 20)
```
### **⚠️ DIVERGENCES**
```
Show Divergences: ON/OFF
RSI Length: 5+
- RSI calculation period (default: 14)
Divergence Lookback: 3-20
- How far back to check (default: 5)
```
### **📋 DASHBOARD**
```
Show Main Dashboard: ON/OFF
- Toggle entire dashboard
Dashboard Position: 9 options
- top_left, top_center, top_right
- middle_left, middle_center, middle_right
- bottom_left, bottom_center, bottom_right
Show HTF Analysis: ON/OFF
- Toggle higher timeframe section
HTF 1: Any timeframe (default: 15)
HTF 2: Any timeframe (default: 60)
HTF 3: Any timeframe (default: 240)
HTF 4: Any timeframe (default: D)
```
### **🎯 TRADE SIGNALS**
```
Show Trade Signals: ON/OFF
- Toggle 🟢 LONG / 🔴 SHORT labels
Show Entry/SL/TP Levels: ON/OFF
- Toggle horizontal lines
Risk:Reward Ratio: 1.0+
- TP3 distance (default: 2.0 = 2:1 R:R)
TP1 % of Total Target: 10-100%
- First target (default: 40%)
TP2 % of Total Target: 10-100%
- Second target (default: 70%)
```
---
## 💡 **7. REAL TRADING EXAMPLES** {#examples}
### **📊 EXAMPLE 1: Perfect Long Setup**
```
SCENARIO: Bitcoin 5-minute chart
Dashboard shows:
✅ 🟢 STRONG BULLISH
✅ HTF1 (15m): UP - STRONG
✅ HTF2 (1H): UP - STRONG
✅ HTF3 (4H): UP - MEDIUM
✅ HTF4 (D): UP - STRONG
✅ Current TF: UP - STRONG
✅ Market Structure: BULLISH
✅ Volume: HIGH 💥
What happened:
1. Price pulled back to green order block (unmitigated)
2. 🟢 LONG signal appeared at $67,500
3. Volume bubble (💥 2.8x) confirmed entry
4. BOS label appeared (continuation)
Entry: $67,500
SL: $67,200 (below OB)
TP1: $67,800 (40%) ✅ Hit
TP2: $68,000 (70%) ✅ Hit
TP3: $68,300 (100%) ✅ Hit
Result: +1.2% profit, 2:1 R:R
```
### **📊 EXAMPLE 2: Perfect Short Setup**
```
SCENARIO: Ethereum 15-minute chart
Dashboard shows:
✅ 🔴 STRONG BEARISH
✅ HTF1 (15m): DOWN - STRONG
✅ HTF2 (1H): DOWN - MEDIUM
✅ HTF3 (4H): DOWN - STRONG
✅ HTF4 (D): DOWN - STRONG
✅ Current TF: DOWN - STRONG
✅ Market Structure: BEARISH
✅ Volume: HIGH 💥
What happened:
1. Price rallied to red order block (unmitigated)
2. 🔴 SHORT signal appeared at $3,520
3. Volume bubble (💥 3.1x) confirmed entry
4. BOS label appeared (bearish continuation)
5. 🔽 BEAR DIV appeared (extra confirmation)
Entry: $3,520
SL: $3,560 (above OB)
TP1: $3,496 (40%) ✅ Hit
TP2: $3,476 (70%) ✅ Hit
TP3: $3,440 (100%) ✅ Hit
Result: +2.3% profit, 2:1 R:R
```
### **📊 EXAMPLE 3: Avoided Bad Trade**
```
SCENARIO: SPY stock 1-hour chart
Dashboard shows:
❌ ⚪ NEUTRAL
❌ HTF1 (15m): UP
❌ HTF2 (1H): DOWN
❌ HTF3 (4H): SIDE
❌ HTF4 (D): UP
❌ Background: Light orange (danger)
What happened:
1. 🟢 LONG signal appeared at $450
2. BUT dashboard showed NEUTRAL
3. Warning: "⚠️ WAIT FOR CLEAR DIRECTION"
4. Ignored signal (followed rules)
5. Price dropped -1.5% shortly after
Result: Avoided -1.5% loss
Key lesson: Trust the dashboard over individual signals!
```
### **📊 EXAMPLE 4: FVG Retest Trade**
```
SCENARIO: Gold futures 30-minute chart
Dashboard shows:
✅ 🟢 BULLISH (2 HTFs aligned)
✅ Current TF: UP - MEDIUM
✅ Large aqua FVG box below price
What happened:
1. Price created large FVG gap
2. Price pulled back into FVG zone
3. 🟢 LONG signal at FVG midpoint $2,045
4. Volume bubble (💥 2.3x) at entry
5. FVG turned yellow (inverted = filled)
Entry: $2,045
SL: $2,040 (below FVG)
TP1: $2,053 (40%) ✅ Hit
TP2: $2,058 (70%) ✅ Hit
TP3: $2,065 (100%) ✅ Hit
Result: +1.0% profit
```
### **📊 EXAMPLE 5: Manipulation Fade**
```
SCENARIO: EUR/USD forex 5-minute chart
Dashboard shows:
✅ 🔴 BEARISH
✅ Current TF: DOWN - STRONG
What happened:
1. Price had large bullish wick
2. ⚠️ MANIPULATION label appeared
3. High volume at wick (stop hunt)
4. Price reversed quickly
5. 🔴 SHORT signal at 1.0895
Entry: 1.0895
SL: 1.0910 (above manipulation wick)
TP1: 1.0880 (40%) ✅ Hit
TP2: 1.0872 (70%) ✅ Hit
TP3: 1.0865 (100%) ✅ Hit
Result: +0.28% profit (30 pips)
```
---
## ⚠️ **8. COMMON MISTAKES TO AVOID**
### **❌ Mistake #1: Trading Against Dashboard**
```
WRONG: Dashboard shows 🔴 BEARISH, but you take a long
CORRECT: Only take shorts when bearish, only longs when bullish
```
### **❌ Mistake #2: Ignoring Higher Timeframes**
```
WRONG: Current 5m looks good, ignored that 1H/4H/D are opposite
CORRECT: Check all HTFs before entry, need 2+ aligned
```
### **❌ Mistake #3: Trading in Neutral Zones**
```
WRONG: Taking trades when dashboard shows ⚪ NEUTRAL
CORRECT: Wait for clear bias (green or red), skip mixed signals
```
### **❌ Mistake #4: No Volume Confirmation**
```
WRONG: Entering without 💥 volume bubble
CORRECT: Wait for high volume institutional participation
```
### **❌ Mistake #5: Ignoring Market Structure**
```
WRONG: Longing into strong bearish structure
CORRECT: Wait for CHOCH (structure change) before reversing
```
### **❌ Mistake #6: Over-Trading**
```
WRONG: Taking every signal that appears
CORRECT: Wait for best setups with all confirmations aligned
```
### **❌ Mistake #7: Moving Stop Loss**
```
WRONG: Moving SL farther away when trade goes against you
CORRECT: Respect original SL, let it hit if wrong
```
### **❌ Mistake #8: Not Taking Partial Profits**
```
WRONG: Holding full position hoping for TP3
CORRECT: Scale out at TP1 (40%), TP2 (70%), let TP3 run
```
---
## 🎯 **9. QUICK REFERENCE CHECKLIST**
### **✅ BEFORE TAKING ANY TRADE:**
```
□ Dashboard shows clear bias (🟢 or 🔴, NOT ⚪)
□ At least 2-3 HTFs aligned with trade direction
□ Current timeframe trend matches trade direction
□ Trend strength is MEDIUM or STRONG (not WEAK)
□ Signal label appeared (🟢 LONG or 🔴 SHORT)
□ Price at key level (OB, FVG, or structure)
□ Volume bubble (💥) confirms entry
□ No opposing divergence signal
□ No opposing CHOCH (reversal warning)
□ Clear entry, SL, and TP levels visible
□ Risk:Reward is favorable (2:1 minimum)
□ Position size calculated (risk max 1-2% account)
```
### **✅ DURING THE TRADE:**
```
□ Monitor dashboard for bias change
□ Watch for CHOCH (could signal reversal)
□ Look for manipulation labels (⚠️)
□ Take partial profits at each TP level
□ Move SL to breakeven after TP1 hit
□ Trail stop using order blocks
□ Exit if dashboard bias changes color
```
### **✅ AFTER THE TRADE:**
```
□ Journal the trade (setup, result, lessons)
□ Review what worked and what didn't
□ Check if you followed all rules
□ Adjust settings if needed
□ Wait for next quality setup
```
---
## 🎓 **10. PRO TIPS**
1. **Best Timeframes**:
- Scalping: 1m, 5m
- Day trading: 5m, 15m
- Swing trading: 1H, 4H
- Position trading: D, W
2. **Best Markets**:
- Crypto (BTC, ETH) = Very responsive
- Forex majors = Clean structure
- Stock indices (SPY, NQ) = Good volume
- Individual stocks = Works best on liquid names
3. **Best Times to Trade**:
- Crypto: 24/7 (best during US/EU hours)
- Forex: London/NY overlap (8am-12pm EST)
- Stocks: First 2 hours + last hour of session
4. **Risk Management**:
- Never risk more than 1-2% per trade
- Use proper position sizing
- Always set stop loss BEFORE entry
- Take profits at planned levels
5. **Optimization**:
- Start with default settings
- Adjust HTFs based on your trading style
- Experiment with swing length for your market
- Tune volume threshold for your asset
---
## 🆘 **11. TROUBLESHOOTING**
### **Problem: No signals appearing**
**Solution:**
- Check if "Show Trade Signals" is enabled
- Verify market has sufficient volatility
- Try lower timeframe (5m instead of 1H)
- Check if conditions are met (volume, structure, RSI)
### **Problem: Too many order blocks**
**Solution:**
- Reduce "Max OBs to Display" (try 5-8)
- Disable "Show EXT Order Blocks"
- Increase swing length to filter minor ones
### **Problem: Dashboard not showing**
**Solution:**
- Enable "Show Main Dashboard"
- Change dashboard position
- Refresh chart
- Check chart has enough data loaded
### **Problem: Signals opposite to dashboard**
**Solution:**
- **Always trust the dashboard over individual signals!**
- This is working as intended - ignore conflicting signals
- Dashboard prevents wrong-direction trades
### **Problem: Too much clutter on chart**
**Solution:**
- Disable FVGs if not using them
- Disable breaker blocks
- Reduce max order blocks
- Hide volume bubbles
- Disable divergences
- Keep only what you actively trade
---
## 🎯 **12. FINAL WORDS**
This indicator is designed to keep you on the RIGHT SIDE of institutional money. The #1 rule is:
> **"When in doubt, follow the dashboard. It's designed to prevent you from trading drunk, stoned, or just plain wrong!"**
### **Your Trading Mantra:**
```
🟢 GREEN DASHBOARD = ONLY LONGS
🔴 RED DASHBOARD = ONLY SHORTS
⚪ NEUTRAL/ORANGE = NO TRADES
Follow this, and you'll stay aligned with smart money!
Remember:
Quality > Quantity
Patience is profitable
The best trade is often no trade
Protect your capital first
Let winners run, cut losers fast
📞 NEED HELP?
If you have questions:
Review this tutorial section by section
Practice on demo account first
Start with larger timeframes (easier to read)
Paper trade until consistently profitable
Start small when going live
Good luck, and trade smart! 🚀📈
Quantum Rotational Field MappingQuantum Rotational Field Mapping (QRFM):
Phase Coherence Detection Through Complex-Plane Oscillator Analysis
Quantum Rotational Field Mapping applies complex-plane mathematics and phase-space analysis to oscillator ensembles, identifying high-probability trend ignition points by measuring when multiple independent oscillators achieve phase coherence. Unlike traditional multi-oscillator approaches that simply stack indicators or use boolean AND/OR logic, this system converts each oscillator into a rotating phasor (vector) in the complex plane and calculates the Coherence Index (CI) —a mathematical measure of how tightly aligned the ensemble has become—then generates signals only when alignment, phase direction, and pairwise entanglement all converge.
The indicator combines three mathematical frameworks: phasor representation using analytic signal theory to extract phase and amplitude from each oscillator, coherence measurement using vector summation in the complex plane to quantify group alignment, and entanglement analysis that calculates pairwise phase agreement across all oscillator combinations. This creates a multi-dimensional confirmation system that distinguishes between random oscillator noise and genuine regime transitions.
What Makes This Original
Complex-Plane Phasor Framework
This indicator implements classical signal processing mathematics adapted for market oscillators. Each oscillator—whether RSI, MACD, Stochastic, CCI, Williams %R, MFI, ROC, or TSI—is first normalized to a common scale, then converted into a complex-plane representation using an in-phase (I) and quadrature (Q) component. The in-phase component is the oscillator value itself, while the quadrature component is calculated as the first difference (derivative proxy), creating a velocity-aware representation.
From these components, the system extracts:
Phase (φ) : Calculated as φ = atan2(Q, I), representing the oscillator's position in its cycle (mapped to -180° to +180°)
Amplitude (A) : Calculated as A = √(I² + Q²), representing the oscillator's strength or conviction
This mathematical approach is fundamentally different from simply reading oscillator values. A phasor captures both where an oscillator is in its cycle (phase angle) and how strongly it's expressing that position (amplitude). Two oscillators can have the same value but be in opposite phases of their cycles—traditional analysis would see them as identical, while QRFM sees them as 180° out of phase (contradictory).
Coherence Index Calculation
The core innovation is the Coherence Index (CI) , borrowed from physics and signal processing. When you have N oscillators, each with phase φₙ, you can represent each as a unit vector in the complex plane: e^(iφₙ) = cos(φₙ) + i·sin(φₙ).
The CI measures what happens when you sum all these vectors:
Resultant Vector : R = Σ e^(iφₙ) = Σ cos(φₙ) + i·Σ sin(φₙ)
Coherence Index : CI = |R| / N
Where |R| is the magnitude of the resultant vector and N is the number of active oscillators.
The CI ranges from 0 to 1:
CI = 1.0 : Perfect coherence—all oscillators have identical phase angles, vectors point in the same direction, creating maximum constructive interference
CI = 0.0 : Complete decoherence—oscillators are randomly distributed around the circle, vectors cancel out through destructive interference
0 < CI < 1 : Partial alignment—some clustering with some scatter
This is not a simple average or correlation. The CI captures phase synchronization across the entire ensemble simultaneously. When oscillators phase-lock (align their cycles), the CI spikes regardless of their individual values. This makes it sensitive to regime transitions that traditional indicators miss.
Dominant Phase and Direction Detection
Beyond measuring alignment strength, the system calculates the dominant phase of the ensemble—the direction the resultant vector points:
Dominant Phase : φ_dom = atan2(Σ sin(φₙ), Σ cos(φₙ))
This gives the "average direction" of all oscillator phases, mapped to -180° to +180°:
+90° to -90° (right half-plane): Bullish phase dominance
+90° to +180° or -90° to -180° (left half-plane): Bearish phase dominance
The combination of CI magnitude (coherence strength) and dominant phase angle (directional bias) creates a two-dimensional signal space. High CI alone is insufficient—you need high CI plus dominant phase pointing in a tradeable direction. This dual requirement is what separates QRFM from simple oscillator averaging.
Entanglement Matrix and Pairwise Coherence
While the CI measures global alignment, the entanglement matrix measures local pairwise relationships. For every pair of oscillators (i, j), the system calculates:
E(i,j) = |cos(φᵢ - φⱼ)|
This represents the phase agreement between oscillators i and j:
E = 1.0 : Oscillators are in-phase (0° or 360° apart)
E = 0.0 : Oscillators are in quadrature (90° apart, orthogonal)
E between 0 and 1 : Varying degrees of alignment
The system counts how many oscillator pairs exceed a user-defined entanglement threshold (e.g., 0.7). This entangled pairs count serves as a confirmation filter: signals require not just high global CI, but also a minimum number of strong pairwise agreements. This prevents false ignitions where CI is high but driven by only two oscillators while the rest remain scattered.
The entanglement matrix creates an N×N symmetric matrix that can be visualized as a web—when many cells are bright (high E values), the ensemble is highly interconnected. When cells are dark, oscillators are moving independently.
Phase-Lock Tolerance Mechanism
A complementary confirmation layer is the phase-lock detector . This calculates the maximum phase spread across all oscillators:
For all pairs (i,j), compute angular distance: Δφ = |φᵢ - φⱼ|, wrapping at 180°
Max Spread = maximum Δφ across all pairs
If max spread < user threshold (e.g., 35°), the ensemble is considered phase-locked —all oscillators are within a narrow angular band.
This differs from entanglement: entanglement measures pairwise cosine similarity (magnitude of alignment), while phase-lock measures maximum angular deviation (tightness of clustering). Both must be satisfied for the highest-conviction signals.
Multi-Layer Visual Architecture
QRFM includes six visual components that represent the same underlying mathematics from different perspectives:
Circular Orbit Plot : A polar coordinate grid showing each oscillator as a vector from origin to perimeter. Angle = phase, radius = amplitude. This is a real-time snapshot of the complex plane. When vectors converge (point in similar directions), coherence is high. When scattered randomly, coherence is low. Users can see phase alignment forming before CI numerically confirms it.
Phase-Time Heat Map : A 2D matrix with rows = oscillators and columns = time bins. Each cell is colored by the oscillator's phase at that time (using a gradient where color hue maps to angle). Horizontal color bands indicate sustained phase alignment over time. Vertical color bands show moments when all oscillators shared the same phase (ignition points). This provides historical pattern recognition.
Entanglement Web Matrix : An N×N grid showing E(i,j) for all pairs. Cells are colored by entanglement strength—bright yellow/gold for high E, dark gray for low E. This reveals which oscillators are driving coherence and which are lagging. For example, if RSI and MACD show high E but Stochastic shows low E with everything, Stochastic is the outlier.
Quantum Field Cloud : A background color overlay on the price chart. Color (green = bullish, red = bearish) is determined by dominant phase. Opacity is determined by CI—high CI creates dense, opaque cloud; low CI creates faint, nearly invisible cloud. This gives an atmospheric "feel" for regime strength without looking at numbers.
Phase Spiral : A smoothed plot of dominant phase over recent history, displayed as a curve that wraps around price. When the spiral is tight and rotating steadily, the ensemble is in coherent rotation (trending). When the spiral is loose or erratic, coherence is breaking down.
Dashboard : A table showing real-time metrics: CI (as percentage), dominant phase (in degrees with directional arrow), field strength (CI × average amplitude), entangled pairs count, phase-lock status (locked/unlocked), quantum state classification ("Ignition", "Coherent", "Collapse", "Chaos"), and collapse risk (recent CI change normalized to 0-100%).
Each component is independently toggleable, allowing users to customize their workspace. The orbit plot is the most essential—it provides intuitive, visual feedback on phase alignment that no numerical dashboard can match.
Core Components and How They Work Together
1. Oscillator Normalization Engine
The foundation is creating a common measurement scale. QRFM supports eight oscillators:
RSI : Normalized from to using overbought/oversold levels (70, 30) as anchors
MACD Histogram : Normalized by dividing by rolling standard deviation, then clamped to
Stochastic %K : Normalized from using (80, 20) anchors
CCI : Divided by 200 (typical extreme level), clamped to
Williams %R : Normalized from using (-20, -80) anchors
MFI : Normalized from using (80, 20) anchors
ROC : Divided by 10, clamped to
TSI : Divided by 50, clamped to
Each oscillator can be individually enabled/disabled. Only active oscillators contribute to phase calculations. The normalization removes scale differences—a reading of +0.8 means "strongly bullish" regardless of whether it came from RSI or TSI.
2. Analytic Signal Construction
For each active oscillator at each bar, the system constructs the analytic signal:
In-Phase (I) : The normalized oscillator value itself
Quadrature (Q) : The bar-to-bar change in the normalized value (first derivative approximation)
This creates a 2D representation: (I, Q). The phase is extracted as:
φ = atan2(Q, I) × (180 / π)
This maps the oscillator to a point on the unit circle. An oscillator at the same value but rising (positive Q) will have a different phase than one that is falling (negative Q). This velocity-awareness is critical—it distinguishes between "at resistance and stalling" versus "at resistance and breaking through."
The amplitude is extracted as:
A = √(I² + Q²)
This represents the distance from origin in the (I, Q) plane. High amplitude means the oscillator is far from neutral (strong conviction). Low amplitude means it's near zero (weak/transitional state).
3. Coherence Calculation Pipeline
For each bar (or every Nth bar if phase sample rate > 1 for performance):
Step 1 : Extract phase φₙ for each of the N active oscillators
Step 2 : Compute complex exponentials: Zₙ = e^(i·φₙ·π/180) = cos(φₙ·π/180) + i·sin(φₙ·π/180)
Step 3 : Sum the complex exponentials: R = Σ Zₙ = (Σ cos φₙ) + i·(Σ sin φₙ)
Step 4 : Calculate magnitude: |R| = √
Step 5 : Normalize by count: CI_raw = |R| / N
Step 6 : Smooth the CI: CI = SMA(CI_raw, smoothing_window)
The smoothing step (default 2 bars) removes single-bar noise spikes while preserving structural coherence changes. Users can adjust this to control reactivity versus stability.
The dominant phase is calculated as:
φ_dom = atan2(Σ sin φₙ, Σ cos φₙ) × (180 / π)
This is the angle of the resultant vector R in the complex plane.
4. Entanglement Matrix Construction
For all unique pairs of oscillators (i, j) where i < j:
Step 1 : Get phases φᵢ and φⱼ
Step 2 : Compute phase difference: Δφ = φᵢ - φⱼ (in radians)
Step 3 : Calculate entanglement: E(i,j) = |cos(Δφ)|
Step 4 : Store in symmetric matrix: matrix = matrix = E(i,j)
The matrix is then scanned: count how many E(i,j) values exceed the user-defined threshold (default 0.7). This count is the entangled pairs metric.
For visualization, the matrix is rendered as an N×N table where cell brightness maps to E(i,j) intensity.
5. Phase-Lock Detection
Step 1 : For all unique pairs (i, j), compute angular distance: Δφ = |φᵢ - φⱼ|
Step 2 : Wrap angles: if Δφ > 180°, set Δφ = 360° - Δφ
Step 3 : Find maximum: max_spread = max(Δφ) across all pairs
Step 4 : Compare to tolerance: phase_locked = (max_spread < tolerance)
If phase_locked is true, all oscillators are within the specified angular cone (e.g., 35°). This is a boolean confirmation filter.
6. Signal Generation Logic
Signals are generated through multi-layer confirmation:
Long Ignition Signal :
CI crosses above ignition threshold (e.g., 0.80)
AND dominant phase is in bullish range (-90° < φ_dom < +90°)
AND phase_locked = true
AND entangled_pairs >= minimum threshold (e.g., 4)
Short Ignition Signal :
CI crosses above ignition threshold
AND dominant phase is in bearish range (φ_dom < -90° OR φ_dom > +90°)
AND phase_locked = true
AND entangled_pairs >= minimum threshold
Collapse Signal :
CI at bar minus CI at current bar > collapse threshold (e.g., 0.55)
AND CI at bar was above 0.6 (must collapse from coherent state, not from already-low state)
These are strict conditions. A high CI alone does not generate a signal—dominant phase must align with direction, oscillators must be phase-locked, and sufficient pairwise entanglement must exist. This multi-factor gating dramatically reduces false signals compared to single-condition triggers.
Calculation Methodology
Phase 1: Oscillator Computation and Normalization
On each bar, the system calculates the raw values for all enabled oscillators using standard Pine Script functions:
RSI: ta.rsi(close, length)
MACD: ta.macd() returning histogram component
Stochastic: ta.stoch() smoothed with ta.sma()
CCI: ta.cci(close, length)
Williams %R: ta.wpr(length)
MFI: ta.mfi(hlc3, length)
ROC: ta.roc(close, length)
TSI: ta.tsi(close, short, long)
Each raw value is then passed through a normalization function:
normalize(value, overbought_level, oversold_level) = 2 × (value - oversold) / (overbought - oversold) - 1
This maps the oscillator's typical range to , where -1 represents extreme bearish, 0 represents neutral, and +1 represents extreme bullish.
For oscillators without fixed ranges (MACD, ROC, TSI), statistical normalization is used: divide by a rolling standard deviation or fixed divisor, then clamp to .
Phase 2: Phasor Extraction
For each normalized oscillator value val:
I = val (in-phase component)
Q = val - val (quadrature component, first difference)
Phase calculation:
phi_rad = atan2(Q, I)
phi_deg = phi_rad × (180 / π)
Amplitude calculation:
A = √(I² + Q²)
These values are stored in arrays: osc_phases and osc_amps for each oscillator n.
Phase 3: Complex Summation and Coherence
Initialize accumulators:
sum_cos = 0
sum_sin = 0
For each oscillator n = 0 to N-1:
phi_rad = osc_phases × (π / 180)
sum_cos += cos(phi_rad)
sum_sin += sin(phi_rad)
Resultant magnitude:
resultant_mag = √(sum_cos² + sum_sin²)
Coherence Index (raw):
CI_raw = resultant_mag / N
Smoothed CI:
CI = SMA(CI_raw, smoothing_window)
Dominant phase:
phi_dom_rad = atan2(sum_sin, sum_cos)
phi_dom_deg = phi_dom_rad × (180 / π)
Phase 4: Entanglement Matrix Population
For i = 0 to N-2:
For j = i+1 to N-1:
phi_i = osc_phases × (π / 180)
phi_j = osc_phases × (π / 180)
delta_phi = phi_i - phi_j
E = |cos(delta_phi)|
matrix_index_ij = i × N + j
matrix_index_ji = j × N + i
entangle_matrix = E
entangle_matrix = E
if E >= threshold:
entangled_pairs += 1
The matrix uses flat array storage with index mapping: index(row, col) = row × N + col.
Phase 5: Phase-Lock Check
max_spread = 0
For i = 0 to N-2:
For j = i+1 to N-1:
delta = |osc_phases - osc_phases |
if delta > 180:
delta = 360 - delta
max_spread = max(max_spread, delta)
phase_locked = (max_spread < tolerance)
Phase 6: Signal Evaluation
Ignition Long :
ignition_long = (CI crosses above threshold) AND
(phi_dom > -90 AND phi_dom < 90) AND
phase_locked AND
(entangled_pairs >= minimum)
Ignition Short :
ignition_short = (CI crosses above threshold) AND
(phi_dom < -90 OR phi_dom > 90) AND
phase_locked AND
(entangled_pairs >= minimum)
Collapse :
CI_prev = CI
collapse = (CI_prev - CI > collapse_threshold) AND (CI_prev > 0.6)
All signals are evaluated on bar close. The crossover and crossunder functions ensure signals fire only once when conditions transition from false to true.
Phase 7: Field Strength and Visualization Metrics
Average Amplitude :
avg_amp = (Σ osc_amps ) / N
Field Strength :
field_strength = CI × avg_amp
Collapse Risk (for dashboard):
collapse_risk = (CI - CI) / max(CI , 0.1)
collapse_risk_pct = clamp(collapse_risk × 100, 0, 100)
Quantum State Classification :
if (CI > threshold AND phase_locked):
state = "Ignition"
else if (CI > 0.6):
state = "Coherent"
else if (collapse):
state = "Collapse"
else:
state = "Chaos"
Phase 8: Visual Rendering
Orbit Plot : For each oscillator, convert polar (phase, amplitude) to Cartesian (x, y) for grid placement:
radius = amplitude × grid_center × 0.8
x = radius × cos(phase × π/180)
y = radius × sin(phase × π/180)
col = center + x (mapped to grid coordinates)
row = center - y
Heat Map : For each oscillator row and time column, retrieve historical phase value at lookback = (columns - col) × sample_rate, then map phase to color using a hue gradient.
Entanglement Web : Render matrix as table cell with background color opacity = E(i,j).
Field Cloud : Background color = (phi_dom > -90 AND phi_dom < 90) ? green : red, with opacity = mix(min_opacity, max_opacity, CI).
All visual components render only on the last bar (barstate.islast) to minimize computational overhead.
How to Use This Indicator
Step 1 : Apply QRFM to your chart. It works on all timeframes and asset classes, though 15-minute to 4-hour timeframes provide the best balance of responsiveness and noise reduction.
Step 2 : Enable the dashboard (default: top right) and the circular orbit plot (default: middle left). These are your primary visual feedback tools.
Step 3 : Optionally enable the heat map, entanglement web, and field cloud based on your preference. New users may find all visuals overwhelming; start with dashboard + orbit plot.
Step 4 : Observe for 50-100 bars to let the indicator establish baseline coherence patterns. Markets have different "normal" CI ranges—some instruments naturally run higher or lower coherence.
Understanding the Circular Orbit Plot
The orbit plot is a polar grid showing oscillator vectors in real-time:
Center point : Neutral (zero phase and amplitude)
Each vector : A line from center to a point on the grid
Vector angle : The oscillator's phase (0° = right/east, 90° = up/north, 180° = left/west, -90° = down/south)
Vector length : The oscillator's amplitude (short = weak signal, long = strong signal)
Vector label : First letter of oscillator name (R = RSI, M = MACD, etc.)
What to watch :
Convergence : When all vectors cluster in one quadrant or sector, CI is rising and coherence is forming. This is your pre-signal warning.
Scatter : When vectors point in random directions (360° spread), CI is low and the market is in a non-trending or transitional regime.
Rotation : When the cluster rotates smoothly around the circle, the ensemble is in coherent oscillation—typically seen during steady trends.
Sudden flips : When the cluster rapidly jumps from one side to the opposite (e.g., +90° to -90°), a phase reversal has occurred—often coinciding with trend reversals.
Example: If you see RSI, MACD, and Stochastic all pointing toward 45° (northeast) with long vectors, while CCI, TSI, and ROC point toward 40-50° as well, coherence is high and dominant phase is bullish. Expect an ignition signal if CI crosses threshold.
Reading Dashboard Metrics
The dashboard provides numerical confirmation of what the orbit plot shows visually:
CI : Displays as 0-100%. Above 70% = high coherence (strong regime), 40-70% = moderate, below 40% = low (poor conditions for trend entries).
Dom Phase : Angle in degrees with directional arrow. ⬆ = bullish bias, ⬇ = bearish bias, ⬌ = neutral.
Field Strength : CI weighted by amplitude. High values (> 0.6) indicate not just alignment but strong alignment.
Entangled Pairs : Count of oscillator pairs with E > threshold. Higher = more confirmation. If minimum is set to 4, you need at least 4 pairs entangled for signals.
Phase Lock : 🔒 YES (all oscillators within tolerance) or 🔓 NO (spread too wide).
State : Real-time classification:
🚀 IGNITION: CI just crossed threshold with phase-lock
⚡ COHERENT: CI is high and stable
💥 COLLAPSE: CI has dropped sharply
🌀 CHAOS: Low CI, scattered phases
Collapse Risk : 0-100% scale based on recent CI change. Above 50% warns of imminent breakdown.
Interpreting Signals
Long Ignition (Blue Triangle Below Price) :
Occurs when CI crosses above threshold (e.g., 0.80)
Dominant phase is in bullish range (-90° to +90°)
All oscillators are phase-locked (within tolerance)
Minimum entangled pairs requirement met
Interpretation : The oscillator ensemble has transitioned from disorder to coherent bullish alignment. This is a high-probability long entry point. The multi-layer confirmation (CI + phase direction + lock + entanglement) ensures this is not a single-oscillator whipsaw.
Short Ignition (Red Triangle Above Price) :
Same conditions as long, but dominant phase is in bearish range (< -90° or > +90°)
Interpretation : Coherent bearish alignment has formed. High-probability short entry.
Collapse (Circles Above and Below Price) :
CI has dropped by more than the collapse threshold (e.g., 0.55) over a 5-bar window
CI was previously above 0.6 (collapsing from coherent state)
Interpretation : Phase coherence has broken down. If you are in a position, this is an exit warning. If looking to enter, stand aside—regime is transitioning.
Phase-Time Heat Map Patterns
Enable the heat map and position it at bottom right. The rows represent individual oscillators, columns represent time bins (most recent on left).
Pattern: Horizontal Color Bands
If a row (e.g., RSI) shows consistent color across columns (say, green for several bins), that oscillator has maintained stable phase over time. If all rows show horizontal bands of similar color, the entire ensemble has been phase-locked for an extended period—this is a strong trending regime.
Pattern: Vertical Color Bands
If a column (single time bin) shows all cells with the same or very similar color, that moment in time had high coherence. These vertical bands often align with ignition signals or major price pivots.
Pattern: Rainbow Chaos
If cells are random colors (red, green, yellow mixed with no pattern), coherence is low. The ensemble is scattered. Avoid trading during these periods unless you have external confirmation.
Pattern: Color Transition
If you see a row transition from red to green (or vice versa) sharply, that oscillator has phase-flipped. If multiple rows do this simultaneously, a regime change is underway.
Entanglement Web Analysis
Enable the web matrix (default: opposite corner from heat map). It shows an N×N grid where N = number of active oscillators.
Bright Yellow/Gold Cells : High pairwise entanglement. For example, if the RSI-MACD cell is bright gold, those two oscillators are moving in phase. If the RSI-Stochastic cell is bright, they are entangled as well.
Dark Gray Cells : Low entanglement. Oscillators are decorrelated or in quadrature.
Diagonal : Always marked with "—" because an oscillator is always perfectly entangled with itself.
How to use :
Scan for clustering: If most cells are bright, coherence is high across the board. If only a few cells are bright, coherence is driven by a subset (e.g., RSI and MACD are aligned, but nothing else is—weak signal).
Identify laggards: If one row/column is entirely dark, that oscillator is the outlier. You may choose to disable it or monitor for when it joins the group (late confirmation).
Watch for web formation: During low-coherence periods, the matrix is mostly dark. As coherence builds, cells begin lighting up. A sudden "web" of connections forming visually precedes ignition signals.
Trading Workflow
Step 1: Monitor Coherence Level
Check the dashboard CI metric or observe the orbit plot. If CI is below 40% and vectors are scattered, conditions are poor for trend entries. Wait.
Step 2: Detect Coherence Building
When CI begins rising (say, from 30% to 50-60%) and you notice vectors on the orbit plot starting to cluster, coherence is forming. This is your alert phase—do not enter yet, but prepare.
Step 3: Confirm Phase Direction
Check the dominant phase angle and the orbit plot quadrant where clustering is occurring:
Clustering in right half (0° to ±90°): Bullish bias forming
Clustering in left half (±90° to 180°): Bearish bias forming
Verify the dashboard shows the corresponding directional arrow (⬆ or ⬇).
Step 4: Wait for Signal Confirmation
Do not enter based on rising CI alone. Wait for the full ignition signal:
CI crosses above threshold
Phase-lock indicator shows 🔒 YES
Entangled pairs count >= minimum
Directional triangle appears on chart
This ensures all layers have aligned.
Step 5: Execute Entry
Long : Blue triangle below price appears → enter long
Short : Red triangle above price appears → enter short
Step 6: Position Management
Initial Stop : Place stop loss based on your risk management rules (e.g., recent swing low/high, ATR-based buffer).
Monitoring :
Watch the field cloud density. If it remains opaque and colored in your direction, the regime is intact.
Check dashboard collapse risk. If it rises above 50%, prepare for exit.
Monitor the orbit plot. If vectors begin scattering or the cluster flips to the opposite side, coherence is breaking.
Exit Triggers :
Collapse signal fires (circles appear)
Dominant phase flips to opposite half-plane
CI drops below 40% (coherence lost)
Price hits your profit target or trailing stop
Step 7: Post-Exit Analysis
After exiting, observe whether a new ignition forms in the opposite direction (reversal) or if CI remains low (transition to range). Use this to decide whether to re-enter, reverse, or stand aside.
Best Practices
Use Price Structure as Context
QRFM identifies when coherence forms but does not specify where price will go. Combine ignition signals with support/resistance levels, trendlines, or chart patterns. For example:
Long ignition near a major support level after a pullback: high-probability bounce
Long ignition in the middle of a range with no structure: lower probability
Multi-Timeframe Confirmation
Open QRFM on two timeframes simultaneously:
Higher timeframe (e.g., 4-hour): Use CI level to determine regime bias. If 4H CI is above 60% and dominant phase is bullish, the market is in a bullish regime.
Lower timeframe (e.g., 15-minute): Execute entries on ignition signals that align with the higher timeframe bias.
This prevents counter-trend trades and increases win rate.
Distinguish Between Regime Types
High CI, stable dominant phase (State: Coherent) : Trending market. Ignitions are continuation signals; collapses are profit-taking or reversal warnings.
Low CI, erratic dominant phase (State: Chaos) : Ranging or choppy market. Avoid ignition signals or reduce position size. Wait for coherence to establish.
Moderate CI with frequent collapses : Whipsaw environment. Use wider stops or stand aside.
Adjust Parameters to Instrument and Timeframe
Crypto/Forex (high volatility) : Lower ignition threshold (0.65-0.75), lower CI smoothing (2-3), shorter oscillator lengths (7-10).
Stocks/Indices (moderate volatility) : Standard settings (threshold 0.75-0.85, smoothing 5-7, oscillator lengths 14).
Lower timeframes (5-15 min) : Reduce phase sample rate to 1-2 for responsiveness.
Higher timeframes (daily+) : Increase CI smoothing and oscillator lengths for noise reduction.
Use Entanglement Count as Conviction Filter
The minimum entangled pairs setting controls signal strictness:
Low (1-2) : More signals, lower quality (acceptable if you have other confirmation)
Medium (3-5) : Balanced (recommended for most traders)
High (6+) : Very strict, fewer signals, highest quality
Adjust based on your trade frequency preference and risk tolerance.
Monitor Oscillator Contribution
Use the entanglement web to see which oscillators are driving coherence. If certain oscillators are consistently dark (low E with all others), they may be adding noise. Consider disabling them. For example:
On low-volume instruments, MFI may be unreliable → disable MFI
On strongly trending instruments, mean-reversion oscillators (Stochastic, RSI) may lag → reduce weight or disable
Respect the Collapse Signal
Collapse events are early warnings. Price may continue in the original direction for several bars after collapse fires, but the underlying regime has weakened. Best practice:
If in profit: Take partial or full profit on collapse
If at breakeven/small loss: Exit immediately
If collapse occurs shortly after entry: Likely a false ignition; exit to avoid drawdown
Collapses do not guarantee immediate reversals—they signal uncertainty .
Combine with Volume Analysis
If your instrument has reliable volume:
Ignitions with expanding volume: Higher conviction
Ignitions with declining volume: Weaker, possibly false
Collapses with volume spikes: Strong reversal signal
Collapses with low volume: May just be consolidation
Volume is not built into QRFM (except via MFI), so add it as external confirmation.
Observe the Phase Spiral
The spiral provides a quick visual cue for rotation consistency:
Tight, smooth spiral : Ensemble is rotating coherently (trending)
Loose, erratic spiral : Phase is jumping around (ranging or transitional)
If the spiral tightens, coherence is building. If it loosens, coherence is dissolving.
Do Not Overtrade Low-Coherence Periods
When CI is persistently below 40% and the state is "Chaos," the market is not in a regime where phase analysis is predictive. During these times:
Reduce position size
Widen stops
Wait for coherence to return
QRFM's strength is regime detection. If there is no regime, the tool correctly signals "stand aside."
Use Alerts Strategically
Set alerts for:
Long Ignition
Short Ignition
Collapse
Phase Lock (optional)
Configure alerts to "Once per bar close" to avoid intrabar repainting and noise. When an alert fires, manually verify:
Orbit plot shows clustering
Dashboard confirms all conditions
Price structure supports the trade
Do not blindly trade alerts—use them as prompts for analysis.
Ideal Market Conditions
Best Performance
Instruments :
Liquid, actively traded markets (major forex pairs, large-cap stocks, major indices, top-tier crypto)
Instruments with clear cyclical oscillator behavior (avoid extremely illiquid or manipulated markets)
Timeframes :
15-minute to 4-hour: Optimal balance of noise reduction and responsiveness
1-hour to daily: Slower, higher-conviction signals; good for swing trading
5-minute: Acceptable for scalping if parameters are tightened and you accept more noise
Market Regimes :
Trending markets with periodic retracements (where oscillators cycle through phases predictably)
Breakout environments (coherence forms before/during breakout; collapse occurs at exhaustion)
Rotational markets with clear swings (oscillators phase-lock at turning points)
Volatility :
Moderate to high volatility (oscillators have room to move through their ranges)
Stable volatility regimes (sudden VIX spikes or flash crashes may create false collapses)
Challenging Conditions
Instruments :
Very low liquidity markets (erratic price action creates unstable oscillator phases)
Heavily news-driven instruments (fundamentals may override technical coherence)
Highly correlated instruments (oscillators may all reflect the same underlying factor, reducing independence)
Market Regimes :
Deep, prolonged consolidation (oscillators remain near neutral, CI is chronically low, few signals fire)
Extreme chop with no directional bias (oscillators whipsaw, coherence never establishes)
Gap-driven markets (large overnight gaps create phase discontinuities)
Timeframes :
Sub-5-minute charts: Noise dominates; oscillators flip rapidly; coherence is fleeting and unreliable
Weekly/monthly: Oscillators move extremely slowly; signals are rare; better suited for long-term positioning than active trading
Special Cases :
During major economic releases or earnings: Oscillators may lag price or become decorrelated as fundamentals overwhelm technicals. Reduce position size or stand aside.
In extremely low-volatility environments (e.g., holiday periods): Oscillators compress to neutral, CI may be artificially high due to lack of movement, but signals lack follow-through.
Adaptive Behavior
QRFM is designed to self-adapt to poor conditions:
When coherence is genuinely absent, CI remains low and signals do not fire
When only a subset of oscillators aligns, entangled pairs count stays below threshold and signals are filtered out
When phase-lock cannot be achieved (oscillators too scattered), the lock filter prevents signals
This means the indicator will naturally produce fewer (or zero) signals during unfavorable conditions, rather than generating false signals. This is a feature —it keeps you out of low-probability trades.
Parameter Optimization by Trading Style
Scalping (5-15 Minute Charts)
Goal : Maximum responsiveness, accept higher noise
Oscillator Lengths :
RSI: 7-10
MACD: 8/17/6
Stochastic: 8-10, smooth 2-3
CCI: 14-16
Others: 8-12
Coherence Settings :
CI Smoothing Window: 2-3 bars (fast reaction)
Phase Sample Rate: 1 (every bar)
Ignition Threshold: 0.65-0.75 (lower for more signals)
Collapse Threshold: 0.40-0.50 (earlier exit warnings)
Confirmation :
Phase Lock Tolerance: 40-50° (looser, easier to achieve)
Min Entangled Pairs: 2-3 (fewer oscillators required)
Visuals :
Orbit Plot + Dashboard only (reduce screen clutter for fast decisions)
Disable heavy visuals (heat map, web) for performance
Alerts :
Enable all ignition and collapse alerts
Set to "Once per bar close"
Day Trading (15-Minute to 1-Hour Charts)
Goal : Balance between responsiveness and reliability
Oscillator Lengths :
RSI: 14 (standard)
MACD: 12/26/9 (standard)
Stochastic: 14, smooth 3
CCI: 20
Others: 10-14
Coherence Settings :
CI Smoothing Window: 3-5 bars (balanced)
Phase Sample Rate: 2-3
Ignition Threshold: 0.75-0.85 (moderate selectivity)
Collapse Threshold: 0.50-0.55 (balanced exit timing)
Confirmation :
Phase Lock Tolerance: 30-40° (moderate tightness)
Min Entangled Pairs: 4-5 (reasonable confirmation)
Visuals :
Orbit Plot + Dashboard + Heat Map or Web (choose one)
Field Cloud for regime backdrop
Alerts :
Ignition and collapse alerts
Optional phase-lock alert for advance warning
Swing Trading (4-Hour to Daily Charts)
Goal : High-conviction signals, minimal noise, fewer trades
Oscillator Lengths :
RSI: 14-21
MACD: 12/26/9 or 19/39/9 (longer variant)
Stochastic: 14-21, smooth 3-5
CCI: 20-30
Others: 14-20
Coherence Settings :
CI Smoothing Window: 5-10 bars (very smooth)
Phase Sample Rate: 3-5
Ignition Threshold: 0.80-0.90 (high bar for entry)
Collapse Threshold: 0.55-0.65 (only significant breakdowns)
Confirmation :
Phase Lock Tolerance: 20-30° (tight clustering required)
Min Entangled Pairs: 5-7 (strong confirmation)
Visuals :
All modules enabled (you have time to analyze)
Heat Map for multi-bar pattern recognition
Web for deep confirmation analysis
Alerts :
Ignition and collapse
Review manually before entering (no rush)
Position/Long-Term Trading (Daily to Weekly Charts)
Goal : Rare, very high-conviction regime shifts
Oscillator Lengths :
RSI: 21-30
MACD: 19/39/9 or 26/52/12
Stochastic: 21, smooth 5
CCI: 30-50
Others: 20-30
Coherence Settings :
CI Smoothing Window: 10-14 bars
Phase Sample Rate: 5 (every 5th bar to reduce computation)
Ignition Threshold: 0.85-0.95 (only extreme alignment)
Collapse Threshold: 0.60-0.70 (major regime breaks only)
Confirmation :
Phase Lock Tolerance: 15-25° (very tight)
Min Entangled Pairs: 6+ (broad consensus required)
Visuals :
Dashboard + Orbit Plot for quick checks
Heat Map to study historical coherence patterns
Web to verify deep entanglement
Alerts :
Ignition only (collapses are less critical on long timeframes)
Manual review with fundamental analysis overlay
Performance Optimization (Low-End Systems)
If you experience lag or slow rendering:
Reduce Visual Load :
Orbit Grid Size: 8-10 (instead of 12+)
Heat Map Time Bins: 5-8 (instead of 10+)
Disable Web Matrix entirely if not needed
Disable Field Cloud and Phase Spiral
Reduce Calculation Frequency :
Phase Sample Rate: 5-10 (calculate every 5-10 bars)
Max History Depth: 100-200 (instead of 500+)
Disable Unused Oscillators :
If you only want RSI, MACD, and Stochastic, disable the other five. Fewer oscillators = smaller matrices, faster loops.
Simplify Dashboard :
Choose "Small" dashboard size
Reduce number of metrics displayed
These settings will not significantly degrade signal quality (signals are based on bar-close calculations, which remain accurate), but will improve chart responsiveness.
Important Disclaimers
This indicator is a technical analysis tool designed to identify periods of phase coherence across an ensemble of oscillators. It is not a standalone trading system and does not guarantee profitable trades. The Coherence Index, dominant phase, and entanglement metrics are mathematical calculations applied to historical price data—they measure past oscillator behavior and do not predict future price movements with certainty.
No Predictive Guarantee : High coherence indicates that oscillators are currently aligned, which historically has coincided with trending or directional price movement. However, past alignment does not guarantee future trends. Markets can remain coherent while prices consolidate, or lose coherence suddenly due to news, liquidity changes, or other factors not captured by oscillator mathematics.
Signal Confirmation is Probabilistic : The multi-layer confirmation system (CI threshold + dominant phase + phase-lock + entanglement) is designed to filter out low-probability setups. This increases the proportion of valid signals relative to false signals, but does not eliminate false signals entirely. Users should combine QRFM with additional analysis—support and resistance levels, volume confirmation, multi-timeframe alignment, and fundamental context—before executing trades.
Collapse Signals are Warnings, Not Reversals : A coherence collapse indicates that the oscillator ensemble has lost alignment. This often precedes trend exhaustion or reversals, but can also occur during healthy pullbacks or consolidations. Price may continue in the original direction after a collapse. Use collapses as risk management cues (tighten stops, take partial profits) rather than automatic reversal entries.
Market Regime Dependency : QRFM performs best in markets where oscillators exhibit cyclical, mean-reverting behavior and where trends are punctuated by retracements. In markets dominated by fundamental shocks, gap openings, or extreme low-liquidity conditions, oscillator coherence may be less reliable. During such periods, reduce position size or stand aside.
Risk Management is Essential : All trading involves risk of loss. Use appropriate stop losses, position sizing, and risk-per-trade limits. The indicator does not specify stop loss or take profit levels—these must be determined by the user based on their risk tolerance and account size. Never risk more than you can afford to lose.
Parameter Sensitivity : The indicator's behavior changes with input parameters. Aggressive settings (low thresholds, loose tolerances) produce more signals with lower average quality. Conservative settings (high thresholds, tight tolerances) produce fewer signals with higher average quality. Users should backtest and forward-test parameter sets on their specific instruments and timeframes before committing real capital.
No Repainting by Design : All signal conditions are evaluated on bar close using bar-close values. However, the visual components (orbit plot, heat map, dashboard) update in real-time during bar formation for monitoring purposes. For trade execution, rely on the confirmed signals (triangles and circles) that appear only after the bar closes.
Computational Load : QRFM performs extensive calculations, including nested loops for entanglement matrices and real-time table rendering. On lower-powered devices or when running multiple indicators simultaneously, users may experience lag. Use the performance optimization settings (reduce visual complexity, increase phase sample rate, disable unused oscillators) to improve responsiveness.
This system is most effective when used as one component within a broader trading methodology that includes sound risk management, multi-timeframe analysis, market context awareness, and disciplined execution. It is a tool for regime detection and signal confirmation, not a substitute for comprehensive trade planning.
Technical Notes
Calculation Timing : All signal logic (ignition, collapse) is evaluated using bar-close values. The barstate.isconfirmed or implicit bar-close behavior ensures signals do not repaint. Visual components (tables, plots) render on every tick for real-time feedback but do not affect signal generation.
Phase Wrapping : Phase angles are calculated in the range -180° to +180° using atan2. Angular distance calculations account for wrapping (e.g., the distance between +170° and -170° is 20°, not 340°). This ensures phase-lock detection works correctly across the ±180° boundary.
Array Management : The indicator uses fixed-size arrays for oscillator phases, amplitudes, and the entanglement matrix. The maximum number of oscillators is 8. If fewer oscillators are enabled, array sizes shrink accordingly (only active oscillators are processed).
Matrix Indexing : The entanglement matrix is stored as a flat array with size N×N, where N is the number of active oscillators. Index mapping: index(row, col) = row × N + col. Symmetric pairs (i,j) and (j,i) are stored identically.
Normalization Stability : Oscillators are normalized to using fixed reference levels (e.g., RSI overbought/oversold at 70/30). For unbounded oscillators (MACD, ROC, TSI), statistical normalization (division by rolling standard deviation) is used, with clamping to prevent extreme outliers from distorting phase calculations.
Smoothing and Lag : The CI smoothing window (SMA) introduces lag proportional to the window size. This is intentional—it filters out single-bar noise spikes in coherence. Users requiring faster reaction can reduce the smoothing window to 1-2 bars, at the cost of increased sensitivity to noise.
Complex Number Representation : Pine Script does not have native complex number types. Complex arithmetic is implemented using separate real and imaginary accumulators (sum_cos, sum_sin) and manual calculation of magnitude (sqrt(real² + imag²)) and argument (atan2(imag, real)).
Lookback Limits : The indicator respects Pine Script's maximum lookback constraints. Historical phase and amplitude values are accessed using the operator, with lookback limited to the chart's available bar history (max_bars_back=5000 declared).
Visual Rendering Performance : Tables (orbit plot, heat map, web, dashboard) are conditionally deleted and recreated on each update using table.delete() and table.new(). This prevents memory leaks but incurs redraw overhead. Rendering is restricted to barstate.islast (last bar) to minimize computational load—historical bars do not render visuals.
Alert Condition Triggers : alertcondition() functions evaluate on bar close when their boolean conditions transition from false to true. Alerts do not fire repeatedly while a condition remains true (e.g., CI stays above threshold for 10 bars fires only once on the initial cross).
Color Gradient Functions : The phaseColor() function maps phase angles to RGB hues using sine waves offset by 120° (red, green, blue channels). This creates a continuous spectrum where -180° to +180° spans the full color wheel. The amplitudeColor() function maps amplitude to grayscale intensity. The coherenceColor() function uses cos(phase) to map contribution to CI (positive = green, negative = red).
No External Data Requests : QRFM operates entirely on the chart's symbol and timeframe. It does not use request.security() or access external data sources. All calculations are self-contained, avoiding lookahead bias from higher-timeframe requests.
Deterministic Behavior : Given identical input parameters and price data, QRFM produces identical outputs. There are no random elements, probabilistic sampling, or time-of-day dependencies.
— Dskyz, Engineering precision. Trading coherence.
